Home

R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer UserManual

1. 153 ANO 153 Maximizing Windows remote esekia ana Meas Time hardware setting Measurement accuracy External generator ssiri roai 53 Measurement channel Creating remote iocur tbe 181 184 Deleting remote iiid cree 182 Duplicating remote 181 Querying remote 182 Renaming remote xa 109 Replacing remote eb toot ete tun 181 Selecting remole EE 184 Measurement time Auto settings inicia iia 144 Displayed cuina ri 11 1 Q data DH Power sensor s LOL REMOTE tiina oa 281 Microbutton PODES cuicos iria 95 Minimum Marker positing sssrini arsina 159 Next eene Softkey Mixer Type External Mixer B2 1 terc 83 MKR OY 151 MKR gt Wm 155 158 Modulation Inverted UO remote Inverted UQ cite rate MSRA Analysis interval caia Operating mode eher tn rre RESTICION PE MSRA applications Capture offset Capture offset remote MSRT Analysis interval rrr ao ci Operating mode rrr recens EE ere MER MSRT applications Capture offset Capture offset remote Multiple Measurement channels AA 10 Multiple ZOOM reir re re nic 161 N Next Minimum Marker positiorillg sie rre tarn opti eret tenen 159 e 159 Next Peak Marker positiohiig imc 159 SOflK6y ic mere rr tre encre 159 Noise R
2. 52 96 97 Supported external generator oooccconccccincccccnncccccnnnno 50 GPIB Address External generator essuss 97 External generator TTL synchronization External generator 97 H Handover frequency External Mixer B21 remote control 202 External Mixer B21 sse 82 Hardware settings DEA A stesnveres 11 Harmonics Conversion loss table B21 sess 89 External Mixer B21 remote control 203 204 Order External Mixer B21 Type External Mixer B21 High pass filter A 187 A ed Eder 78 Hold ele uscar bea 149 Hysteresis Lower Auto level teret rone ter erant 145 Trigger s Trigger Power sensor sse 109 Upper Auto level eee 144 l 1 Q Analyzer Data acquisition it desd 21 EVall LEE 16 UO Vector evaluation seee 17 Magnitude evaluation enn 16 Maximum bandwidth 5 err rnnt en 24 Medea des derer X 180 Programming example 326 327 Real Imag I Q evaluation ooooocoiccnncnnnnnnncconoccciccccnn 18 eut eenegen ees reese cede 16 la 24 Spectrum evaluation oooococnncccconocccconccnconnncncnnnncnnonnnno 17 1 Q data Analog processing erret 21 37 Digital PrOCESSING WEE 30 Exp
3. RST Reset the instrument INST CRE IQ IQANALYZER Creates a new measurement channel named IQANALYZER INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode NP SEL DIQ Selects the digital baseband interface as the input source INP DIQ CDEV Queries the detected information for the connected instrument INP DIQ SRAT AUTO ON Sets the input sample rate to the rate of the connected instrument automatically NP DIQ RANG UPP 2 V Sets the level for value 1 to 2 V INP DIQ RANG COUP ON Adjusts the reference level to the full scale level automatically after every change TRIG SOUR BBP TRIG SEQ LEV BBP 20 Trigger on baseband power of 20 dBm TRAC IQ SRAT 32MHZ Defines the sample rate TRAC IQ RLEN 1000 Sets the record length number of samples to capture to 1000 samples 10 11 4 Programming Examples TRAC IO BWID Queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter determined by the sample rate FORM DATA REAL 32 Formats the data as 32 byte real values TRAC TO DATA FORM IQP Lists all I values first then all Q values in the trace results TRAC IQ AVER ON Defines averaging for the I Q trace TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Defines an average over 10 sweeps DISP TRAC1 MODE WRIT DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC3 MODE MINH Changes the trace modes INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished TRAC DATA TRACE
4. Option Bl ctas 119 ee 44 Protective remote sese 186 Audio signals Output remote EE 112 236 Auto adjustment Triggered measurement 5 n 268 Auto all SOfIKGy moni ere ee Pee deas 143 Auto frequency DONKEY ET 143 Auto ID External Mixer B21 remote control 201 External Mixer B21 isseire REES 85 Threshold External Mixer B21 remote control 201 Threshold External Mixer B21 sess 85 Auto level Hysteresis i eer te Rer 144 145 Reference level 118 122 144 TEE 118 122 144 Auto settings Meastime Auto softkey ooooocoocnnnncncnncioconccanccnnno 144 Meastime Manual softkey sess 144 Automatic coupling Frequencies external generator 56 99 AUX control TTL synchronization external generator 48 Average count Power SenSOF iii 108 Average mode MICI e 150 Averaging Traces remote control AA 284 B Band Conversion loss table B21 sss External Mixer B21 remote control ver External Mixer B21 incoaci n Bandwidth Analysis suits 135 depending on sample rate ssssssssssss 35 Digital ee E 33 Extension 136 Extension options 24 26 VQ Analyzer ener ciento kr tante 24 Maximum 136 Maximum usable
5. ccccccssssssssccseessssscecsecseesessscecceeecssesensceesesesceaccectenaeass 300 GALGulate MARKker F NCGtion FPEeaks X 2 recorre tr eer rci truco y TALA Aaa 301 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks X CAL Culate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks Y CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks Y CAECulate MARKerEOEXclude ette oo nia ha fuc cut e pide sc desea aii CALCulate MARKer X SLIMItS E E CAl Culate MARKerXSLIMits RIGETT ooo retenta secet epe e pe gc nea CAL CulateMAbker XG IMits ZOOMISTATel EE 294 GALGulate MARKer X SEIMItS STATE lito err enc certe arsine dress 293 GAL ee 291 CALCulate MSRACALING SHO Wisssioiacta e a 305 CALCulate EE ET Ee TT EE 305 CALGulate MSRA WINDOWSNS VAL coca aT p npe ias 306 CAL Culate RTMS ALINe SHOW CALCulate RTMS ALINe VALue CAL Culate R TMS WINDowsn gt EE 308 CAL Culate ARG SHON geegent GCALGulate THReshold S RRE CALGulatezn gt DELTamarkerADEE EN CALCulatesn gt DEL Tamarker MOD cosilla ee e CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK T CALCulate nz DEI Tamarkerzmz MAximumlEET eene en nnnn nennt nn thn stt nrns i 298 CALCulate cnz DEI Tamarkerzmz MAximumNENT A 298 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker cmz MANimumRIGHt A 298 CAlCulate cnz D I Tamarker mz MAXimumf DEART invii 298 CALCulate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNimum LEET 298 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarkercmz MiNimum NENT 298 CAL Culate lt n gt DEL
6. Parameters lt MeasType gt Example Usage Manual operation Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements THRough TRANsmission mode calibration with direct connection between external generator and device input REFLection mode calibration with short circuit at the input OPEN only allowed in REFLection mode calibration with open input INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep operation CORR METH TRAN Selects a transmission measurement CORR COLL THR WAI Starts the measurement of reference data using direct connec tion between generator and device input and waits for the sweep end Setting only SCPI confirmed See Calibrate Reflection Short on page 101 See Calibrate Reflection Open on page 101 SENSe CORRection METHod This command selects the type of measurement to be performed with the external gen erator This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce Parameters Example Manual operation EXTernal STATe on page 218 REFLection Selects reflection measurements TRANsmission Selects transmission measurements RST TRANsmission CORR METH TRAN Sets the type of measurement to transmission See Calibrate Transmission on page 101 See Calibrate Reflection Short on page 101 See Calibrate Reflection Open on page 101 SENSe CORRection RECall This command restores the measurement configuration used for calibration This co
7. Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespec tive of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increases the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 239 Unit Reference Level The R amp S FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impedance 50 Q or 75 Q see Impedance on page 78 conversion to other units is possible The fol lowing units are available and directly convertible e dBm dBmV dByV dBpA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 188 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT PO
8. Softkey nn Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 93 Connector remote auccm trs 186 Couplitig NEE 78 Coupling remote certe sc 197 Digital Baseband Interface B17 settings 91 Q Gata files ann m cem ete 80 A emere eere eed 44 Overload remote 186 E EE 78 Ge codo Heer eoe ba rte he 76 77 120 Signal parameters incerti termes 44 flc 76 Source Configuration softkey ssss 77 Source Analog Baseband AAA 93 Source connection errors i322 Source digital WO EE 91 So rce displayed trm 12 Source Radio frequency RE 77 Input sample rate ISR Definition Digital UO Input sources VQ data file eicere im 80 l Q data file remote itte 189 1 Q data files JEE E IQBlock I G data files ice 336 IQPair I GQ data E 336 K Keys EINES riot USB terere eet 72 MKR e HQ 151 MKR gt 155 158 Peak Search carencias non chere 159 RUN CONT 55 tir rette aceti andi 141 RUN SINGLE erri Yani meatier 141 142 L Level Triggered KEE 254 Limit lines Peak Sam mcr na io 157 Linking EI 153 LO Level External Mixer B21 remote control 200 Level External Mixer B21 esses 84 Lower Level Hysteresis SOfIKGy iii 145 LVDS connector Bilal 334 LVL External generator e reete 58 M
9. ett tertie o nete te terae 79 External Mixer Settings cuca paa 80 e Digital VQ Input Settitigs EE 91 e Analog Baseband Input Gettngs cnn rca 93 o reel 95 e External Generator Control Settings eiit tinens 95 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source mme a sg Input e m Nias 22 Enartrim won Input Source Power Sensor Probes Radio Frequency On External Input Coupling Mixer Impedance al Digit IQ High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Analog YIG Preselector Baseband Input Connector Data Input and Output Settings Radio Frequency EI 78 ATONE e a a a E E 78 limpedarnge nn ninia 78 Flidli Pass Filter E EE 78 VIG Prosolo TE 79 Input Connector I ida 79 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 188 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very l
10. o Bandwidth extension options The maximum usable l Q bandwidth provided by the R amp S FSW in the basic installation can be extended by additional options These options can either be included in the ini tial installation B options or updated later U options The maximum bandwidth provi ded by the individual option is indicated by its number for example B40 extends the bandwidth to 40 MHz Note that the U options as of U40 always require all lower bandwidth options as a pre requisite while the B options already include them Max usable Required B option Required U option s UO BW 10 MHz 28 MHz B28 U28 40 MHz B40 U28 U40 or B28 U40 80 MHz B80 U28 U40 U80 or B28 U40 U80 or B40 U80 The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B320 U320 requires a reference board revision 3 14 or higher The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 requires a reference board 1312 8075 06 revision 4 06 or higher and a motherboard 1313 4180 02 or 1313 7698 02 EE User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 24 Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input Max usable Required B option Required U option s UO BW 160 MHz B160 U28 U40 U80 U160 or B28 U40 U80 U160 or B40 U80 U160 or B80 U160 320 MHz B320 U28 U40 U80 U160 U320 or B28 U40 U80 U160 U320 or B40 U80 U160 U320 or B80 U160 U320 or B160 U320 500 MHz B500 See data sheet The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B3
11. 143 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freg 143 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 144 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 144 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual 144 Upper evel FlysSIgle5lg roe oreet tee vertere dace dre S dade daa 144 Lower Level HySteresis eee ecce terree di ete stud e EE e E e A Ee RE D 145 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto AII Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings This includes e Auto Frequency e Auto Level This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 266 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq This function adjusts the center frequency automatically The optimum center frequency is the frequency with the highest S N ratio in the fre quency span As this function uses the signal counter it is intended for use with sinus oidal signals Adjusting Settings Automatically This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 268 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the pr
12. SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory on the instrument This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr This command deletes the selected conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 210 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL CLE Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Table on page 87 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent lt Text gt This command defines a comment for the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 210 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Text gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL COMM Conversion loss table for FS Zen Manual operation See Comment on page 89 SENSe CORRection CVL DATA lt Freq gt lt Level gt This command defines the reference values of the selected conversion loss tables The values are entered as a set of frequency
13. Signal generator Signal and Spectrum e g R amp S SMU Analyzer R amp S FSW e Output of digital UO data to a selected receiver e g to implement fading simulat ing mobile radio communication participants using a generator LVDS LVDS Digital Digital Baseband Baseband output input ERREE 9 o p p Signal and Spectrum Signal generator Analyzer R amp S FSW e g R amp S SMU Capturing and evaluating digital UO data from a device with a user specific inter face using an R amp S EX IQ BOX see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX External Signal Inter face Module Manual LVDS LVDS Custom Custom Digital Digital Baseband Baseband Baseband Baseband output input output input R amp S Ex 1 Q Box Signal and Spectrum Analyzer R amp S FSW Output of digital UO data to a device with a user specific interface using an R amp S EX IQ BOX see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX External Signal Interface Module Man ual LVDS LVDS Digital Digital Custom Custom Baseband Baseband Baseband Baseband output input output input rai E uso ee data R amp S Ex 1 Q Box Signal and Spectrum Analyzer R amp S FSW o R amp S EX IQ BOX and R amp S DiglConf The R amp S EX IQ BOX is a configurable interface module that converts signal properties and the transmission protocol of the R amp S instruments into user defined or standardized signal formats and vice versa The latest R amp S EX IQ BOX model 1409 5505K04 provid
14. The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 10 2 Common Suffixes The following common suffixes are used in remote commands specific to the UO Ana lyzer application Suffix Value range Description lt m gt 1 16 Marker lt n gt 1 6 Window lt t gt 1 6 Trace 10 3 Activating UO Analyzer Measurements UO Analyzer measurements require a special measurement channel on the R amp S FSW It can be activated using the common INSTrument CREate NEW or INSTrument CREate REPLace commands In this case some but not all param eters from the previously selected application are passed on to the UO Analyzer chan nel see chapter 6 1 Default Settings for UO Analyzer measurements on page 72 In order to retain all relevant parameters from the current application for the UO measure ment use the
15. This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtify WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Query only LAY out WINDow lt n gt REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix lt n gt from the display The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Usage Event LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout NINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 270 for a list of availa ble window types 10 6 QD Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Different measurement procedures Two different procedures to capture UO data remotely are available e Measurement and result query with one command see TRACe 10 DATA on page 309 This method causes the least delay between measurement and output of the result data but it requires the control comput
16. Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 241 INPut GAIN VALue on page 242 6 5 2 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input The following settings and functions are available to define amplitude settings for input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 in the applications that support it They can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude tab of the Input dialog box Amplitude Amplitude Scale Reference Level Input Settings Offset Unit Auto Level Full Scale Level Mode Value The input settings provided here are identical to those in the Input Source gt Analog Baseband tab see chapter 6 4 1 5 Analog Baseband Input Settings on page 93 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual R ference Level cian did dica di nde ii di 121 L Shifting the Display OSOl iocococionococicassosic n sasssnssdsanatasadavandcdeans ENEE 121 e E 122 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 122 Full Scale Level Mode Value crac 122 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog
17. Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input cations on the R amp S FSW are capable of sampling and processing the individual and Q components of the complex signal UO Analyzer processing complex data from RF input The UO Analyzer for example is a standard application used to capture and analyze UO data on the R amp S FSW By default it assumes the l Q data is modulated on a car rier frequency and input via the RF INPUT connector on the R amp S FSW The A D converter samples the IF signal at a rate of 200 MHz The digital signal is down converted to the complex baseband lowpass filtered and the sample rate is reduced An equalizer filter before the resampler compensates for the frequency response of the analyzer s analog filter stages which would otherwise add to the modu lation errors The continuously adjustable sample rates are realized using an optimal decimation filter and subsequent resampling on the set sample rate A special memory capture buffer is available in the instrument for a maximum of 400 Ms 400 1024 1024 of complex samples pairs of and Q data The number of com plex samples to be captured can be defined for restrictions refer to chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 24 The block diagram in figure 5 1 shows the analyzer hardware from the IF section to the processor Data aquisition hardware digital down conversion continuous decimation analo
18. User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 3 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Contents 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 8 1 8 2 8 3 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 A A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 EU 147 ULI due D 147 Marker US2DO iooiocociciioianiccnarra ici ana ea 151 ZOOM FUNCOMS ss cc n 161 Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode eese canon nn nn rn cnn nr nennen riens 162 How to Work with UO Data oooooccccconnnccccccccccccnnnacancnnnnnnnnnaaannnnnnns 164 How to Perform Measurements in the UO Analyzer Application 164 How to Capture or Output UO Data via Optional Interfaces 166 How to Export and Import UO Data oooonnonccncucococicocinaninancnccncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnancnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 170 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 173 Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data 174 INTO MU CHION 174 AAPP o 179 Activating UO Analyzer Measurements eene nnn nnn 179 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements eene 185 Configuring the Result Display eene nnne 269 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps eee 276 VQ AN Aly SIS coi ia c 282 Retrieving Results oie etie sccctiecessccteececseateaeessasaceetecesssezeres 308 Importing and Exporting
19. e The I Q data analysis mode is turned off TRAC IQ EVAL OFF if previous applica tion was also I Q Analyzer Note To turn trace display back on or to enable the evaluation functions of the UO Analyzer execute the TRAC IQ EVAL ON command see TRACe IO EVAL on page 184 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example TRAC IQ ON Switches on UO data acquisition 10 4 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements The following commands configure the UO Analyzer measurements e Configuring the Data Input and Output 186 e Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Gcalmg essre esseere 238 LEE E e 244 TO lt NR 246 Configuring Data ACQUISII N nuda ide 257 Adjusting Settings Automatically con etae tre Rete Ee 266 10 4 1 10 4 1 1 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Configuring the Data Input and Output PRE le E 186 e Input from Q Data FIG eorr etre ther poteet eerta kei Food keine 189 Configuring Digital 1 Q Input and Output cc 2 encontre ern ee nes 190 e Configuring Input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 195 Using Extemal MKA sc rtt ettet eet rait ee tte cent re 199 e Setting le 212 e External Generator Control 215 e Working with GE E reiecit ee bett edt te rtc t Eois Dudas 225 e Comigurina the OUIBUES crier rU reete ir e erre red C eed o venen 236 RF Input INPuEATTenuation PROTecUon RESt 2 1c ciet id 186 INPUUEGONNOGIOE E 186 NPU
20. CVL Table not selected Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 207 Managing Conversion Loss Tables In this tab you configure and manage conversion loss tables Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain frequencies The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are obtained via interpolation The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box All conversion loss tables found in the instrument s C r_s instr user cv1l direc tory are listed in the Modify Tables list Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Digital IQ NeW Table RE NUES 86 el ak E 87 Delete Table uc lidia 87 IMPOR Table asocian Aa 87 New Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to configure a new conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 87 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 210 Data Input and Output Settings Edit Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 87 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 210 Delete Table Deletes the currently selected conversion l
21. Example TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The sweep starts every 50 s Manual operation See Repetition Interval on page 131 10 4 4 2 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors The tasks for manual operation are described in Trigger 2 3 on page 113 OUT PUE TRIGSerspor DIREC uo tote e nd tea bea ttt e tle AEN 252 DUTPuE TRIGgerspor LEVEL aii 253 OUTPut TRIGger port OTYP2e 1ieeeeeu e ckee nene tokaa onu catum nt p daadaa 253 ODTPutTRIGGersport PUESe1MMSG Idte 2 2 1o Erud tt her rtt bo tex ette 254 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSeEENGIh uiii oo itt oit oorr hacia 254 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt Direction gt INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 113 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel lt Level gt This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TIRIGgersport 0TYPe Suffix port Selects the tr
22. SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle VALue on page 229 Using the power sensor as an external trigger If activated the power sensor creates a trigger signal when a power higher than the defined External Trigger Level is measured This trigger signal can be used as an external power trigger by the R amp S FSW This setting is only available in conjunction with a compatible power sensor Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger STATe on page 236 TRIG SOUR PSE see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 250 External Trigger Level Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the trigger level for the power sensor trigger 6 4 2 3 Data Input and Output Settings For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger LEVel on page 235 Hysteresis Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Setting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis on page 234 Trigger Holdoff Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HOLDoff
23. T Descrip T DES AAA NEEE EATER EAEE Input INPUESCUINOS LR Input status remote ssssseee amore Output connection status remote 194 Outp t settiligs irt er 115 116 Status ENN E 320 322 Digital UO Bandwidth S ascii rinna raa 33 Connection information rr enn 116 Data processing E Enhanced mode E Full scale level ico Input connection information esssesss 92 Input settings E Outputsettings air mre ete 115 Output settings information sesssss 116 Sample rates Kyle Uri e e Digital input Bandwidth teer mereri Connection information menn Connection Status sion ii Digital Baseband Interface B17 RESTMICIONS e Unfiltered rent rer err mn Digital output Connection status siii 36 Digital Baseband Interface BI 32 Enabling PTOCOSSINO E 33 RESTICIONS eorr rr rer rer re 34 Display configuration SOKOV iii 142 Drop out time A 131 Trigger Power sensor nette 109 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 181 Duty cycle POWEF SENSON ciar 108 E Edge Nee GE Bet LE 254 Electronic input attenuation eeseesesess 119 Enhanced mode BITS CIN LO AAA 34 130 Equalizer Data process WEE
24. TRIG SOUR GPO see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 250 RF Power Trigger Source Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre quency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the data sheet Trigger Settings Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the sweep may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis This trigger source is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 If the trigger source RF Power is selected and digital UO or analog baseband input is activated the trigger source is automatically switched to Free Run Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 250 Power Sensor Trigger Source Trigger Source Uses an external power sensor as a trigger source This option is only available if a power sen
25. To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on REESEN User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 303 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data eS SS AA A A A A EE EE EEE A EEE A A A SS AAA 1 Frequency Sweep 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 161 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 161 See Restore Original Display on page 162 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 162 10 7 4 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captu
26. irl Channel bar Information external generator ooooocconnccccinocccconanccc no 58 Clock rate Dei RH dd 33 Closing Channels remota ecc ree ees 182 Windows remote 2 1 ree iren 272 275 Common mode offset ie T T M 46 Configuring Data acquisition remote ssesses 257 VQ Analyzer remote EE 185 Markers remota ctn a 287 Connector Baseband Input rociar 37 Connectors AUX control external generator sssss 48 External generator control ee 48 led 48 IE VIDEQ DEMOB eege eiis re edet 113 Continue single sweep SOKOV pe ae 142 Continuous sweep DONKEY aee whe n ee oret en E Ree 141 Conventions SCPH cominands terere nn 175 Conversion loss External Mixer B21 remote control 205 Conversion loss tables Available remote control sess 207 Band remote control Bias remote control i Configuring Blasio A A iaia aad aa ri a arree Deleting remote control ES External Mixer B21 remote control 205 External Mixer B21 a o ens Harmonic order remote control Importing External Mixer B21 Managing E Mixer type remote control A Saving External Mixer B21 Selecting remote control AA Shifting valu
27. on page 47 e Interface Configuration Settings iei ad 96 EE e 98 e Source Calibration Functons nn 100 Interface Configuration Settings The interface settings for the connection to the external generator are defined in the Interface Configuration subtab of the External Generator tab Tm rcc panel Simulation Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Probes Measurement interface Settings Source Capabilities Configuration Generator Type Frequency Min Interface Interface Frequency Max Configuration TTL Handshake EI Level Min Source Calibration GPIB Address Level Max Reference Edit Generator Setup File For more information on configuring interfaces see the Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols section in the R amp S FSW User Manual GOMGRALOE TY ET 96 Ju Le 96 TIL Eet 97 GPIB Address TCP IP Address 97 iere e et ee deeg 97 Edit Generator Setup Re cana ada 97 Frequency Min Frequency Max 97 Level Min Level A NENNEN ERREN 97 Generator Type Selects the generator type and thus defines the generator setup file to use For an overview of supported generators see chapter 5 4 4 2 Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option on page 50 For information on generator setup files see chapter 5 4 4 3 Generator Setup Files on page 52 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE on page 220 Interface Type of interface connection used T
28. tion e Center frequency e Number of sweep points e Range per division x axis e Span Spectrum Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar For details see Error Messages on page 173 3 Typical Applications for the UO Analyzer and Q Input Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase I and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as UO signals I Q signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be ana lyzed in the I Q baseband Thus the I Q Analyzer is ideal for analyzing UO baseband signals The optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 can be used to capture or output the UO data The following typical applications use the R amp S Digital Baseband Interface e Capturing and evaluating digital UO data in the I Q Analyzer application of the R amp S FSW base unit or other optional applications e g R amp S FSW K70 VSA See also the description of the individual applications LVDS LVDS Digital Digital Baseband Baseband output input eeee c Hi Gee
29. AAA i n gt Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 10 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command Reset va
30. Activating remote control sesssssss 200 Band Basic settings rivadavia Configuration onion rtr rers Conversion loss Conversion loss tables oooooccccnocococccncccanonanononos 86 87 Frequency Ee onion rr rien ees Handover frequency e Harmonie Ord 6 etre dus Harmonic Type eie iere oras Name Programmirng exambple oi 210 tue M Restoring bands RF overrange uere tete RF Start RF Stop Serial number WY External reference External generator cent nes 50 External generator control sess 97 External trigger Configuring power Sensor see 111 Level POWER SENSOR aient eme 108 Level remot Jr rrt tenes 249 Power sensor a SOMKEY coimas F Falling Slope Power sensor eene 109 FFT UE Eegenen ed 64 measurementispeed rtc radar sam 67 WINdOW TUNCHONS 2n c toner rt oerte reete 63 139 File format ek 338 Files O data binary XML enit na 342 I Q data input UC parameter XML icon cia 339 Filters Bandwidth Q data ccoo aia 135 Digital Baseband Interface B17 136 Digital UO remote control rsisi iras 261 Equalizer zn Highispass remote viii e nct cts 187 Highiepass RF MPU E 78 1 Q data taxes O 187 Format Data ini a ida 335 Data temote 2 iaa 312 eg IER TE 336 Free Run Tirigger et EE 128
31. CAL e DEE E ER KEE 290 CAL Culate nz M Abkercmz TR ACe has ssentsssassstii asse isis sa saine ias 290 GALCulate n s MARKeESIYSK EEN 291 CALCulate n DELTamarker AOFF This command turns all delta markers off Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State This command links delta marker lt m gt to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position x value of marker 1 delta marker m changes its horizontal position to the same value IO Analysis Tip to link any marker to a different marker than marker 1 use the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt or CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt commands Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 LINK ON Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 153 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt lt State gt This command links delta marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker lt m2 gt If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2 gt delta marker lt m1 gt changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links the delta marker 4 to the marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 153 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker MODE lt Mode gt Th
32. IQ0 SET NORM 0 32000000 IQ0P POS 0 1000 Configures the sample rate as 32 MHz IQP trigger positive trigger slope no pretrigger samples 1000 samples to capture FORM REAL 32 The data is formatted as real values TRAC IQ EGAT ON Turns on gated measurement TRAC IQ EGAT TYPE LEV Select the level gate type TRAC IQ EGAT LENG 20 Sets the gate length to 20 samples TRAC IQ EGAT GAP 20 Sets the interval between gate periods to 20 samples TRAC IQ EGAT NOF 2 Sets the number of gate periods after the trigger signal to 2 RIG SOUR IQP E El Defines the magnitude of the sampled I Q data to be used as a trigger RIG LEV IQP 30dbm gt El 10 11 3 Programming Examples Sets the trigger level TRAC IQ DATA WAI Performs a measurement and returns the RF input voltage at each sample point first 1000 I values then 1000 Q values TRAC IQ DATA MEM 0 500 Returns the first 500 samples of the stored trace data for the measurement For each sample first the I value then the Q value is listed TRAC IQ DATA MEM 500 500 Returns the second half of the 1000 captured sample values Data Acquisition via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 This example demonstrates how to capture UO data via the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 using the UO Analyzer in a remote environment 555sssessseses Activating the I Q Analyzer application
33. Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connector Data Input and Output Settings Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 253 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 252 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 For details see the description of the STATus OPERat ion register in the R amp S FSW User Manual and the description of the AUX port in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 253 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 253 Pulse Len
34. Magnitude Evaluation method s src 16 UO Analyzer eee 16 Marker peak list soe ll 160 Marker search area Remote Cohlrol E 292 Marker table Evaluation method A 19 Marker to Trace inc m 153 Markers Assigned ACE MERC 153 SERI Io 151 Configuration remote Control 287 Configuration softkey 151 154 pa E 154 Delta MARK ORS oidos eere teer tir ciere Elena rh 153 Fixed reference remote control 291 oleo d O 151 287 IT 153 Aloan Io erc 159 Minimum remote control wae 202 205 Next MINIMUM suus den coro rear chron EE siae rhe orietur e 159 Next minimum remote control 292 295 eck PEAK a ET 159 Next peak remote control ssss 292 295 Peak deem Ee e ee eege SEN 159 Peak remote control weer 292 295 Peak list remote control sessess 299 Let len E 153 xe iMIo nope 158 Positioning remote control ssssssss 287 Querying position remote sese 316 Retrieving results remote ssssssss 315 Search remote control Setting center frequency eee 159 Setting reference level rne 159 State iii es 152 DIED SIZE tees 2195 Step size remote control 24291 Tale inicio e ete 2 155 Table evaluation method isisisi 19 Table remote control cts 291 D cl
35. Manual mode in Advanced FFT mode val ues from 3 to 524288 are available However the window length may not be longer than the FFT Length Remote command SENSe IQ FFT WINDow LENGth on page 259 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA or MSRT operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time off set between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 In MSRT mode the offset may be negative if a pretrigger time is defined Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 306 SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet on page 308 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration EH 6 8 2 Sweep Settings The sweep settings are configured via the SWEEP key or in the Sweep tab of the Bandwidth dialog box Data Acquisition Sweep Sweep Count jAi gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Bandwidth button in the configuration Overview and switch to the Sweep tab e Select the SWEEP key and then the Sweep Config softkey Sweep E 140 oweeop Average e EE 141 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT ccccsescccssssssesessessssecsseeseeeecseesenseeesseesseesssssnseees 141 Single Sweep RUN GINGLE A 141 CONTINUE SINGIS WES 142 Sweep Points In the UO Analyze
36. Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config esses 150 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Gohtkeys A 150 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted orange Remote command Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe lt 1 6 gt commands Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one ESS S JUN NS NN NUUS User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 148 Trace Settings Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging pro cedures View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 283 Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis The trace detector is used to combine multiple FFT window results to cre
37. RST OFF Example PMET1 ON Switches the power sensor measurements on Manual operation See State on page 106 See Select on page 106 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATe lt State gt This command turns continuous update of power sensor measurements on and off If on the results are update even if a single sweep is complete Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET1 UPD ON The data from power sensor 1 is updated continuously Manual operation See Continuous Value Update on page 106 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for absolute power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Unit gt DBM WATT W RST DBM Example UNIT PMET POW DBM Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 107 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer RATio lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for relative power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Unit gt DB PCT RST DB Example UNIT PMET POW RAT DB Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 107 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Triggering with Power Sensors SENSe PMETer p TRIGger DTIMe cesses nennen rhet hne hn nenne 234 SENSeTPMETerspecIRIGgeisbIOLbDolf vd 234 SENSe PMETer lt p gt T
38. SENSe MIXerBIAS LOWL ocio cionado 200 SENSE IM LO POWer cuota A AAA ARO AAA 200 SENSE Mixer alicia da 201 SENSe MIXer TH esbold nn nennen nn nn cnn nn 201 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SENSe MIXer STATe lt State gt Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the mea surement This command is only available if the R amp S FSW B21 option is installed and an external mixer is connected Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX ON Manual operation See External Mixer State on page 82 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the high Second range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 200 Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 85 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the low first range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 200 Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 85 SENSe MIXer LOPower lt Level gt This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Parameters lt Level gt numeric value Range 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm Increment 0 1 dB RST 15 5 dBm Example
39. Spectrum Usage Query only Table 10 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum 1 Q Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel Activating UO Analyzer Measurements Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation ADEM Analog Demod R amp S FSW K7 GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay MCGD R amp S FSW K17 MC Group Delay Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW PNOISE K40 Phase Noise Transient Analysis TA R amp S FSW K60 Transient Analysis VSA R amp S FSW K70 VSA 3GPP FDD BTS RES FSW K72 3G FDD BTS 3GPP EDD UE R amp S FSW K73 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE RES FSW K77 TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW K82 CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW K83 CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW K84 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW K85 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN LTE R
40. Traces A cra erepta Paseo e e E EI ERR 150 Averaging remote control sssssssss 284 Configuration softkey sse 147 Configuring remote control sssssss 282 Copying remote control sss 285 A ee eeeger 149 Detector remote control ssssess 285 te lo E E untere EE 149 MOS cocaina 148 Mode remote cococoocoocociccccocccooccconcconcnconcconnccnncnonnnnno 283 Retrieving Femole urn o coin ter ttr be se 309 Settings remote control ssssssssss 282 Settings predefined WEE 150 od CMM 150 Tracking see External generator eren 98 Transducers Calibration with external generator 54 102 Transmission measurement Calibration external generator sss 101 External generator nm mre rte 49 Trigger Configuration SOflKOy o niei rs 126 Drop out time n Drop out time Power sensor eeses 109 Exterrial remote caracas 250 External power 108 Hold arras 2192 Holdoff Power sensor 109 Hysteresis nt war 182 Hysteresis Power sensor 109 Ho 131 Level Power sensor seeeeeeeeeeene 108 Offset SOME EE 132 edu E 113 132 Power sensor 108 111 Remote control 2 ret e 246 S
41. for future use currently 0 OUTP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 0ut A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 See Output Settings Information on page 116 See Connected Instrument on page 116 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements 10 4 1 4 Configuring Input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 The following commands are required to control the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 in a remote environment They are only available if this option is instal led For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface see chapter 5 3 Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface on page 37 For a programming example see chapter 10 11 6 Data Acquisition via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 on page 331 Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 188 e SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 244 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output leie Leg TEEN KR RE 195 INPUEICXFULESCASTALITO EE 196 INPut IO FOLEESealer EE Vel ia eR ne eut eo mee ea 196 INPULIQ dE 196 e Ee Kleer ui 197 CALIbrationAlQ gieren DEE 197 SENSe JPROBe lt ch SETUp CMOFfSet coccion aan 198 IRAGCIOJAPCOnESTATS ER 198 KR le e EE 198 TRACE OAR COM EE 199 TRACH
42. on page 69 Which type of measurement is to be performed conventional UO data analysis or a time or frequency domain measurement is selected in the Select Measurement dia log box which is now displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe I Q Analyzer menu select the Select Meas softkey e Press the MEAS key The common measurements as in the Spectrum application are listed In addition IQ Analyzer is provided under Basic Measurements to return to the default UO Analysis functions Rec Length 1001 gt Ll Power Measurements Statistics Measurements Basic Measurements Channel Power ACLR bi Time D in P Configuring an UO Analyzer as an MSRA MSRT Application The time and frequency domain measurements and the required settings are descri bed in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Multiple measurements Only one measurement type can be configured per channel however several chan nels for time or frequency based measurements on UO data can be configured in par allel on the R amp S FSW Thus you can configure one channel for conventional UO Analysis for example and another for an SEM or power measurement on the same data Then you can switch through the results easily by switching tabs or monitor all results at the same time in the MSRA MSRT View Remote command CALCulate IQ MODE on page 180 Trace Settings 7 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines e
43. remote pte term rei 270 Closing rremiote ER 272 275 Config rihgi ertet Freenet 75 Layout remote 273 Maximizing remote de nnm 270 Querying remote 271 272 Replacing remote etie hte oet 272 Splitting Huele 270 Types remote lamas nens 270 X X value MAK CB ser Gerh tpe ete tavasnasexadensststen ebe Seded 153 Y Y axis feo Tr 124 Scaling UO Vector ssssssese 124 i uprce M E 123 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating eeren 79 Activating Deactivating remote 187 Z Zeroing Power SENSO 1 rper nb dee 106 Zoom limits USING TOF searches coe renes 158 Zooming Activating remote verint cetero 303 Area Multiple mode remote ooocoococnccnnnccincicccccnns Area remote Deactivating Multiple mode Multiple mode remote coccconcoccnnccinoicccinncanons ioc Restoring original display Single mode secci Single mode remote AAA
44. 21 Errors Data acqulisitiOli s ceca oer tr sais 320 Device connections BI 322 Digital Baseband Interface B17 iS Ae Ce e dees Evaluation methods tege ee caracas 270 Example Remote control of an external generator 223 Exclude LO remote control sees 292 Exporting VQ d ta imn 62 72 76 170 338 342 UO data remote AA 317 ris ER 161 cle M 76 External generator Activating Deactivating seseesees 98 cELI 47 Calibration D nie 100 Calibration measurement settings 98 Channel bar information Elei EE Coupling frequ ncies rr th ties Errors Generators supported mne later Interface settings Normalizing EE Overloading siii nt rrr ires Recalling calibration settings E Reference level ditt etit Reference JING s iiir etie ride ee rid Reference line position E Reference line value sssssesssse Reference posillOn tte Reference trace Reference value nornas riter te cane Reflection measurement cocconnccconoccccconcccccnnccnonanacinannns Reflection open measurement id Reflection short measurement cceeeeeeteeeeee 101 Remote Control ES 215 Settings W ransducer factor 5 nn 54 102 Transmission measurement coocccccccncccnooonnccnnns 49 101 TTL synchronization Extemal Mixer B24 aia eres
45. 293 7 2 2 2 Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search or set other characteristic values to the current marker value These functions are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key Peak SEARCH uctor ect ofer a t e tee ee C Ye c Ee eoe rtv EE oot 159 Search Next E 159 SAC EU Te In EE 159 Search Next Tele e iia ii 159 Center Frequency Marker Frequency eeiam tn nennen 159 Reference Level Marker Level 159 Marker Usage Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 296 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 298 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 296 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 298 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 297 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 299 Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker d
46. 40 0 60 0 V 50 0 75 0 E 60 0 90 0 W 75 0 110 0 F 90 0 140 0 D 110 0 170 0 G 140 0 220 0 J 220 0 325 0 Y 325 0 500 0 USER 32 18 68 22 default default The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe State This command specifies whether a second high harmonic is to be used to cover the band s frequency range Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON Manual operation See Range 1 2 on page 83 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high second range Parameters HarmOrder numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition Example MIX HARM HIGH 2 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 83 SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE lt OddEven gt This command specifies whether the harmonic order to be used should be odd even or both Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Parameters lt OddEven gt ODD EVEN EODD RST EVEN Example MIX HARM TYPE ODD Manual operation See Harmonic Type on page 83 SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low first range Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band de
47. 92 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 92 The availa bility of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt Level gt VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 92 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 see Input Sample Rate on page 91 Note the final user sample rate of the R amp S FSW may differ and is defined using TRAC 10 SRAT see TRACe 10 SRATe on page 263 Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 91 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital UO input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 91 OUTPut DIQ lt State gt This command turns continuous output of I Q data to the optional Digital Baseband In
48. Analog UO Data from RF Input Table 5 3 Maximum record length with activated UO bandwidth extension option B320 or U320 Sample rate Maximum record length 100 Hz to 200 MHz 440 MSamples 200 MHz to 468 MHz 470 MSamples sample rate 1GHz 468 MHz to 10 GHz 220 MSamples for sample rates lt 200 MHz the UO Bandwidth Extension B320 is not used 5 1 1 2 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated UO Bandwidth Extension Option B500 The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 provides measurement bandwidths up to 500 MHz Digital Baseband output Digital Baseband output see Digital Baseband Output on page 115 is not available for an active R amp S FSW B500 bandwidth extension Realtime measurements and thus the entire MSRT operating mode are not available O Realtime measurements and MSRT operating mode if the R amp S FSW B500 bandwidth extension option is installed Sample rate Maximum I Q bandwidth 100 Hz to 600 MHz proportional up to maximum 500 MHz 600 MHz to 10 GHz 500 MHz Bandwidths between 480 MHz and 500 MHz Note the irregular behavior of the sample rate usable UO bandwidth relationship for bandwidths between 480 MHz and 500 MHz depending on which setting you change For compatibility reasons the relationship of Usable I Q bandwidth 0 8 Output sam ple rate is maintained for bandwidths lt 480 MHz However in order to make use of the maximum possible sample
49. Analyzer for instance will principally show the same results as the zero span measurement for the same data However while the Magnitude evaluation is configured by the l Q analysis bandwidth and the measurement time the zero span measurement is configured by the center frequency RBW and sweep time settings Internally these time domain settings are converted to the required UO settings by the UO Analyzer The time and frequency domain measurements and the required settings are descri bed in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Limitations However since the data in the UO Analyzer application is captured by the Master independantly of the specific time or frequency measurement requirements concerning the RBW filter type and number of sweep points in the application some restrictions may apply to these measurements in the UO Analyzer If not enough samples are available in the captured and converted UO data for example an error message is dis played in the application The maximum span for a frequency sweep on l Q based data corresponds to the maximum UO bandwidth see chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 24 and chapter 5 2 3 Sample Rates and Band widths for Digital UO Data on page 33 The maximum resolution bandwidth RBW is 1 MHz Furthermore the following functions are not available for time and frequency domain measurements in multistandard mode e Marker demodulat
50. Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 144 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FSW determines the length of the measurement Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S FSW determines the measurement length automati cally according to the current input data MANual The R amp S FSW uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 266 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 144 See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 144 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 269 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when t
51. Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 188 UO Mode Defines the format of the input signal For more information see chapter 5 3 3 UO Processing Modes on page 40 Data Input and Output Settings jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component Only Low IF I The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT I connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband l If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF 1 Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IQ TYPE on page 196 Input configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain UO signal via 2 simple ended lines Note Both sin
52. CDEV Activates the digital baseband interface for output and queries the detected information of the connected instrument INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished The results are simultaneously sent to the output connector 10 11 6 Data Acquisition via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 This example demonstrates how to capture UO data via the optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the UO Analyzer in a remote environment As an input signal a differential probe is assumed to be connected to the R amp S FSW Jdem iiie Activating the I Q Analyzer application RST Reset the instrument INST CRE IQ IQANALYZER Creates a new measurement channel named IQANALYZER INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INP SEL AIQ Selects the analog baseband interface as the input source Programming Examples INP IQ TYPE I Only the signal on I input is analyzed I only mode INP IQ BAL ON Differential input signal INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF INP IQ FULL LEV 2V Peak voltage at connector is set manually to the maximum of 2V FREQ CENT 1MHz Shift center frequency to 1 MHz Low IF I i A Configuring Data Acquisition RIG SOUR BBP RIG SEQ LEV BBP 20 E i El T Trigger on baseband power of 20 dBm RAC IQ SRAT 32MHZ E El Defines the sample rate RAC IQ RLEN 1000 J Sets
53. Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index 0 0 QIO1 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 1 0 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 2 01 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 0 11 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 111117 0111 II Channel 1 Complex sample 1 21 1 0121111 Channel 2 Complex sample 1 01 2 O 0 21 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 17 2 0111121 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 21121 QE2 E21 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 13 randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k f10at32 fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands UO Analyzer Q Input Interfaces B17 B71 SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCtion AUTO esee nennen 285 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt trace gt FUNCTION 0 nennen 285 SENSO JADJ StA O ciu arc o 266 SENSe JADJust CONFigure DURAtiON miosina 266 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE tatit nre a a 267 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Teresis EO Wr menthe rr ener tra nt rer rrr neis 267 SENSe ADJ
54. EI EE ade ELE 234 Configuring Power Sensors SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe 225 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNtP A 226 Sv Tem CGOMMunicate RDEVice PME Tercps DEFime nennen 226 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt CONFigure AUTO STATe lt State gt This command turns automatic assignment of a power sensor to the power sensor index on and off Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET CONF AUTO OFF Manual operation See Select on page 106 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt This command queries the number of power sensors currently connected to the R amp S FSW Parameters lt NumberSensors gt Number of connected power sensors Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET COUN Usage Query only Manual operation See Select on page 106 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine lt Placeholder gt lt Type gt lt Interface gt lt SerialNo gt This command assigns the power sensor with the specified serial number to the selected power sensor index configuration The query returns the power sensor type and serial number of the sensor assigned to the specified index Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Setting parameters lt Placeholder gt Currently not evaluated lt SerialNo
55. Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 156 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 156 See Search Next Peak on page 159 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 159 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 156 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 156 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value 10 7 2 5 IO Analysis Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 156 See Search Next Minimum on page 159 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a
56. External power trigger tte nns 108 External trigger level 108 Frequency ss 107 Frequency Coupling 107 Measurement time 107 Number of readings 108 R amp S Power Wiewer isc 103 Reference level 107 108 Reference level offset ee 108 Isesults ees 103 Selecting 106 Setting up 109 Settings 105 Trigger ul EE 131 Unit Scale icri rr reir rece res 107 Using 74 ello MES 106 111 Preamplifier Iu 120 DONKCY eT Ya ned atin edie aes 120 Preset Bands External Mixer B21 remote control 202 External Mixer B21 Aen ceca tote ets 82 Presetting EEN Il Default values m a e Probes Common Mode Offset tenen 46 Connectors Microbutton wie E EE Programming examples External Mixer B21 ie 210 re Analyzer 2 deniers Protection sigo RF input remote Q Quick Config WR ACCS oe PEE ER 150 R R amp S DIGIC OME S 1er stt beso Inns 15 92 R amp S Digital Baseband Interface B17 see Digital Baseband Interface B17 13 R amp S EX IQ BOX WW Bree EE 92 R amp S Power Viewer PIUS reete eerte 103 R amp S SMA External generator issart noioe Fever geck 50 R amp S SMU External generator ceperint eie i Deere enean ano d RBW hardware setting Real Imag I Q Evaluati
57. FSW User Manual Reference Format Description for UO Data Files COMPatible IQBLock IQPair mode Q Data 1 512k I Data Q Data OF 512k Q Data x X N 512k Q Data I Data X N 512k Q Data Fig 1 2 I Q data formats Note 512k corresponds to 524288 samples For maximum performance the formats Compatible or IQPair should be used Fur thermore for large amounts of data the data should be in binary format to improve performance In binary format the number of l and Q data can be calculated as follows af DataBytes ofi Data of Q Data 3 For the format QBLock the offset of Q data in the output buffer can be calculated as follows Hof DataBytes Q Data Offset 2 LengthindicatorDigits with LengthIndicatorDigits being the number of digits of the length indicator including the In the example above 41024 this results in a value of 6 for LengthIndica torDigits and the offset for the Q data results in 512 6 518 UO Data File Format iq tar AA VQ Data File Format iq tar UO data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An iq tar file contains l Q data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the Source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the
58. FSW must supply the required bandwidth i e the bandwidth exten sion option R amp S FSW B160 or higher must be installed and active The connected device must support data transfer rates up to 200 Msps Restrictions for digital in and output The following table describes the restrictions for digital in and output Table 5 5 Restrictions for digital in and output Parameter Minimum Maximum Record length 2 complex samples 220 1024 1024 complex samples Input sample rate ISR 100 Hz 10 GHz Sample Rate SR Digital Max 100 Hz ISR 8388608 Min 10 GHz 2 ISR input User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 34 Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Parameter Minimum Maximum Sample Rate SR Digital 100 Hz 200 MHz output Usable UO bandwidth Min 0 8 SR 0 8 ISR Digital input and filter active Unfiltered UO data input The values in table 5 5 apply for the default data processing using the decimation filter and resampler If the filter is deactivated see Omitting the Digital Decimation Filter No Filter on page 136 the analysis sample rate is identical to the input sample rate In this case the usable UO bandwidth is not restricted by the R amp S FSW Bandwidths Depending on the sample rate the following bandwidths are available Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Usable IQ bandwidth ISR Filter can
59. FSW with those of the signal generator e Manual coupling a single frequency is defined e Automatic coupling a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW the RF fre quency range covers the currently defined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator Automatic coupling If automatic coupling is used the output frequency of the generator source frequency is calculated as follows Source Freq RF Numeral Offset Denominator Output frequency of the generator 5 1 where F Generator OUtput frequency of the generator F analyzer Current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW Numerator multiplication factor for the current analyzer frequency Denominator division factor for the current analyzer frequency Forse frequency offset for the current analyzer frequency for example for frequency converting measurements or harmonics measurements The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator The default setting is O Hz Offsets other than O Hz are indicated by the FRQ label in the channel bar see also chapter 5 4 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 58 Swept frequency range The Fanalyzer Values for the calibration sweep start with the start frequency and end with the stop frequency defined in the Frequency settings of the R amp S FSW The resulting output fre
60. Instrument Device Name SMBYV 100A Serial Number 257374 Port Name Dig BB In For details on digital UO output see chapter 5 2 2 Digital Output on page 32 Digital Baseband Map ur CT E 115 Output settings unten E Le DEE 116 Connected MN Ein ninia br 116 Digital Baseband Output Enables or disables a digital output stream to the optional Digital Baseband Interface RSS FSW B17 if available Note If digital baseband output is active the sample rate is restricted to 200 MHz max 160 MHz bandwidth See also Digital UO enhanced mode on page 34 The only data source that can be used for digital baseband output is RF input T User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 115 6 5 6 5 1 Amplitude For details on digital UO output see chapter 5 2 2 Digital Output on page 32 Remote command OUTPut DIQ on page 193 Output Settings Information Displays information on the settings for output via the Digital Baseband Interface RSS FSW B17 The following information is displayed e Maximum sample rate that can be used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface i e the maximum input sample rate that can be processed by the con nected instrument e Sample rate currently used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface e Level and unit that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 194 Connected Instrument Displays in
61. MHz to 40 MHz without the B71E option or 80 MHz to 80 MHz with the B71E option to avoid effects from unwanted signal components e g mirrored sidebands Thus always select the maxi mum analysis bandwidth and the position of the center frequency such that the spec trum remains within the specified limits You are not forced by the R amp S FSW to do so but a warning message will be displayed if the limits are exceeded Table 5 7 Spectrum limits depending on I Q mode UO Mode Complex baseband I jQ Low IF 1 Q Real Baseband I Q Analysis BW 80 MHz default BW 40 MHz default BW 40 MHz bandwidth default EN BW 160 MHz with B71E BW 80 MHz with B71E option option BWmax 80 MHz with BWmay 2 BW 2 lt f S BWna 2 BWna 2 BWI2 lt f lt BWma 2 P 1E option BW 2 BW 2 Center BW 2 lt f lt BW 2 0 f lt BW f 0Hz frequency TT ie fo 40 MHz to 40 MHz default 10 Hz to 40 MHz default 80 MHz to 80 MHz with B71E 10 Hz to 80 MHz with B71E option option Span Sample rate Sample rate Sample rate 2 not forced by R amp S FSW Average Power Consumption The Analog Baseband interface can be used to capture two different signals one pro portional to the voltage and one proportional to the current of a DUT The average power consumption can then be calculated from the captured UO signal To avoi
62. MIX LOP 16 0dBm Manual operation See LO Level on page 84 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SENSe MIXer SIGNal State This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Parameters State OFF ON AUTO ALL OFF No automatic signal detection is active ON Automatic signal detection Signal ID is active AUTO Automatic signal detection Auto ID is active ALL Both automatic signal detection functions Signal ID Auto ID are active RST OFF Manual operation See Signal ID on page 85 See Auto ID on page 85 SENSe MIXer THReshold Value This command defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison see SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 201 Parameters Value numeric value Range 0 1 dB to 100 dB RST 10 dB Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Auto ID Threshold on page 85 Mixer Settings The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer set tings ISENZGe Mixer EREOuencv HANDover ttes nsns nn nn tre re nein 202 SENSeTMIXeEPREGUency STARI aun cuir erdt reae De naue tea ida 202 SENSe MIXer FREGiiiency S TOP3 2 acce enaci ituri a ada d XR ELE ENEE EEN 202 SE
63. PO EN 76 A Le eoo theta de aM ade M D aM UE 76 3190 LT Sage dee ee 76 o e EE RR 76 Import Provides functions to import data UO Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual UO import is not available in MSRA MSRT mode Remote command MMEMor y LOAD 10 STATe on page 318 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export UO Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process I Q data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Man
64. Parameters lt Format gt SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGle Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL Configuring the Result Display DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 273 Parameters lt Size gt LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG 10 5 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix lt n gt always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 184 Beer EI EE 270 AYout CATalog WINDOW ion cai iaa 271 Beleg WINDOW iaa Aid 272 LAYout REMove WIND
65. SEL LOSS TAB Ai Manual operation See New Table on page 86 See Edit Table on page 87 See File Name on page 88 SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber lt SerialNo gt This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 210 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt SerialNo gt Serial number with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX 123 4567 Manual operation See Mixer S N on page 89 Programming Example Working with an External Mixer This example demonstrates how to work with an external mixer in a remote environ ment It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer this measurement will not return useful results ees Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON dl Configuring basic mixer behavior Set the LO level of the mixer s LO port to 15 dBm SENS MIX LOP 1
66. TES 17 Breas IVA E Oe 18 Maket KE 19 Marker Peak lista EE 19 Magnitude Shows the level values in time domain R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Measurement and Result Displays MultiView Spectrum Analog Demod IQ Analyzer O AQT 31 s SRate 32 0 MHz z RecLength e 1AP Clrw I lagnitude 1001 pts Remote command LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH MAGN See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 270 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 313 Spectrum Displays the frequency spectrum of the captured UO samples MultiView 5 Ref Level Bm Meas Time Att OdB Freq 4 0GHz Rec Length TRG EXT1 1 Spectrum CF 4 0 GHz i 4096 pts 3 2 MHz Span 32 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH FREQ see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 270 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 313 Q Vector Displays the captured samples in an Q plot The samples are connected by a line ES User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 17 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Measurement and Result Displays EEN MultiView Spectrum 2 IQ Analyzer Ref Level 223 61 mV AQT 31 3ps SRate 32 0 MHz Att dB Freq 30 0MHz RecLength 1001 IRG IFP mee Note For the l Q vector result display the number of I Q samples to record Record Length must be identical to the number of trace points to be displayed Sweep Points for UO Analyzer 1001 For record lengths outside the valid range of sweep points the diagram does not show valid results
67. This parameter is only available for instrument models R amp S FSW43 50 67 ViDeo Sends the displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF signal 200mV to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector This setting is required to send demodulated audio frequencies to the output RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nector Manual operation See IF VIDEO DEMOD Output on page 112 OUTPut IF IFFRequency Frequency This command defines the frequency for the IF output The IF frequency of the signal is converted accordingly This command is available in the time domain and if the IF VIDEO DEMOD output is configured for IF If the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used TRACe IQ WBANd ON see TRACe IQ WBANd STATe on page 264 this command is available as a query only It returns the used IF output frequency which is defined automatically by the application accord ing to the center frequency For more information see chapter 5 4 8 IF and Video Signal Output on page 61 Parameters Frequency RST 50 0 MHz Manual operation See IF Wide Out Frequency on page 113 OUTPut IF2 SBANd This command queries the IF sideband sent to the IF 2 GHZ OUT The sideband depends on the current center frequency 10 4 2 10 4 2 1 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements This command is available in the time domain and if the output is configured for IF2 see OUTPut IF SOU
68. UO data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in car format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the UO data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Sample iq tar files If you have the optional R amp S FSW VSA application R amp S FSW K70 some sample iq tar files are provided in the C R_S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xml Contains meta information about the l Q data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single UO parameter XML file inside an iq tar file e Q data binary file e g xyz complex f10oat32 Contains the binary l Q data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file e Q preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser A sample
69. WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 243 Reference Value Defines the reference value to be displayed at the specified Result Frequency Start This setting can be used to shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace simi lar to the Shifting the Display Offset defined in the Amplitude settings shifts the ref erence level in the display Shifting the normalized trace is useful for example to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT If you then zoom into the diagram around the normal ized trace the measured trace still remains fully visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue on page 221 Data Input and Output Settings 6 4 2 Power Sensors 6 4 2 1 The R amp S FSW can also analyze data from a connected power sensor e Basics oh Power SEAS iii did 103 e Power Sensor Seti Sucia ec 105 e How to Work With a Power Gensor nono nananino none 109 Basics on Power Sensors For precise power measurement up to 4 power sensors can be connected to the instru ment via the power sensor interface on the front panel Both manual operation and remote control are supported Currently only R amp S NRP Zxy power sensors are supported For a detailed list of sup ported sensors see the data sheet Power sensors can also be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level e g from a signal generator see Using a Power Sensor as an External Power
70. a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results Alternatively to capturing UO data by the I Q Analyzer itself stored UO data from previ ous measurements or other applications can be imported to the UO Analyzer Further more UO data processed in the UO Analyzer can be stored to a file for further evalua tion in other applications 0 UO data can only be exported in applications that process l Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results For details on importing and exporting UO data see chapter 5 5 I Q Data Import and Export on page 62 Ee Bee e VC 318 IMMEMory STORE ere E EE 318 MMEMorySTORENO STA Te occasion cias dad 318 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores l Q data from a file The file extension is iq tar Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See 1 Q Import on page 76 MMEMory STORe IQ COMMent lt Co
71. actual trigger event TPIS sample trigger start event This value can only be determined in triggered measurements using external or IFPower triggers otherwise the value is O This command is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active and not for bandwidths 80 MHz Example TRAC IQ TPIS Result for a sample rate of 1 MHz between 0 and 1 1 MHz i e between 0 and 1 us the duration of 1 sample Usage Query only Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 132 TRACe lQ WBANd STATe State This command determines whether the wideband provided by bandwidth extension options is used or not if installed Parameters lt State gt Manual operation Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements ON OFF ON If enabled installed bandwidth extension options can be used They are activated for bandwidths gt 80 MHz if the bandwidth is not restricted by the TRACe 10 WBANd MBWIDTH command Otherwise the currently available maximum bandwidth is allowed see chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable IO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 24 This parameter corresponds to the Auto setting in manual operation with TRACe 10 WBANd MBWIDTH 320 MHZ OFF The bandwidth extension options R amp S FSW B500 B320 B160 are deactivated the maximum analysis bandwidth is restricted to 80 MHz This parameter corresponds to the 80 MHZ setting in manual operation RST ON
72. amp S FSW B17 The status of the STATus QUESTionable SYNC register is indicated in bit 11 of the STATus QUESTionable register You can read out the state of the register with STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition on page 321 and STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt on page 322 Bit No Meaning 0 7 not used 8 I Q data acquisition error This bit is set if an error occurs during UO data acquisition because the input sample rates or number of samples between the signal source and the R amp S FSW do not match See also Error Messages on page 173 Querying the Status Registers Bit No Meaning 9 14 not used 15 This bit is always set to 0 STATUS QUEStOnable SYNC eelere E 321 STATUS QUEStonable S d e TEE 321 STATus QUEStionable SYNO NTRansITOFI iicet ette canta rr 321 STATUus QUEStionable S et Re EE 322 STATUS QUEStionable S d der E KEE 322 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVEN section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register Th
73. amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Realtime Spectrum RTIM Realtime Spectrum R amp S FSW K160R Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename Activating UO Analyzer Measurements lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the channel with the name Spectrum2 to Spectrum3 INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name Also see e INSTrument CREate NEW on page 181 Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 182 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel Example INST SAN Activates a measurement channel for the Spectrum application INST MySpectrum Selects the measurement channel named MySpectrum for example before exe
74. applications You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 144 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 269 Full Scale Level Mode Value The full scale level defines the maximum power you can input at the Baseband Input connector without clipping the signal 6 5 3 Amplitude The full scale level can be defined automatically according to the reference level or manually For manual input the following values can be selected e 025V e 05V e 1V e 2V If probes are connected the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power For details on probes see chapter 5 4 3 Using Probes on page 45 Remote command INPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on page 196 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel on page 196 Scaling the Y Axis The individual scaling settings that affect the vertical axis are described here To configure the y axis scaling settings Vertical Axis settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box gt To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Amplitude from the Overview e Select the AMPT key and then the Scale Config softkey Amplitude Scale Range Scaling Logarithmic Range 100 dB v Linear Percent Ref Level Position 100 0 6 x S E Linear wi
75. be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 10 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 175 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM Common Suffixes 10 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 10 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data
76. binary format 2 kBytes Return values lt Results gt Example Usage Retrieving Results Measured voltage for and Q component for each sample that has been captured during the measurement For analog baseband input in real baseband mode the results for the irrelevant component are all 0 For more information see chapter 5 3 3 I Q Processing Modes on page 40 The number of samples depends on TRACe 10 SET In ASCII format the number of results is 2 the number of samples The data format depends on FORMat DATA Default unit V TRAC IQ STAT ON Enables acquisition of UO data TRAC IQ SET NORM 10MHz 32MHz EXT POS 0 4096 Measurement configuration Sample Rate 32 MHz Trigger Source External Trigger Slope Positive Pretrigger Samples 0 Number of Samples 4096 FORMat REAL 32 Selects format of response data TRAC TO DATA Starts measurement and reads results Query only TRACe IQ DATA FORMat Format This command selects the order of the UO data For details see chapter A 3 Reference Format Description for I Q Data Files on page 336 Parameters Format COMPatible IQBLock IQPair COMPatible and Q values are separated and collected in blocks A block 512k of values is followed by a block 512k of Q values fol lowed by a block of values followed by a block of Q values etc 1 1 1 1 Q Q Q Q 1 1 1 1 Q Q Q Q IQBLock First all l values a
77. by the I Q Analyzer can also be used in MSRA mode In MSRT mode the MSRT Master performs a realtime measurement to capture data Note that the available functions and settings for the UO Analyzer in MSRA mode vary depending on whether the MSRA Master channel or an UO Analyzer application chan nel is selected For example data acquisition settings for an l Q Analyzer application channel in MSRA mode configure the analysis interval not an actual data capture from the input signal And measurements in the time and frequency domain are only availa ble in an UO Analyzer application channel in MSRA mode R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on l Q Data Acquisition and Processing Enea uiti mci Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view m
78. delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 159 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 156 Marker Peak Lists Useful commands for peak lists described elsewhere e CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion on page 292 e MMEMory STORe PEAK on page 302 Remote commands exclusive to peak lists CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel S TATe 299 CAL CulateM Ab kertFUNCHon Fake COUNG se nenna ses nn nsns nens aan 300 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate eee 300 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST at 200 CAL Culate nz M Ab kermzFUNCHiontbtake SOT 301 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STAT ccccscccccescceceecesessseeseecceeseeeeseaeses 301 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Fbteakey esee nnns st aisi ETE 301 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Fbteakey sese sten sensa ahinan 301 MMEWMory STORe PEAK isses eee ee eee neret tih nh nennt etre n esee senes n sns n nnns nnn nn 302 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEa
79. duration 0 4 Flattop Worst Best Good Accurate single tone measurements 5 Term Good Good Best Measurements with very high dynamic range 5 6 2 Overlapping The I Q Analyzer calculates multiple FFTs per measurement by dividing one captured record into several windows Furthermore the UO Analyzer allows consecutive win dows to overlap Overlapping reuses samples that were already used to calculate the preceding FFT result R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing EE Overlap area In advanced FFT mode with averaging the overlapping factor can be set freely The higher the overlap factor the more windows are used This leads to more individual results and improves detection of transient signal effects However it also extends the duration of the calculation The size of the window can be defined manually according to the record length the overlap factor and and the FFT length With an overlap of the FFTs of 67 for example the second data block the R amp S FSW performs the FFT on covers the last 67 of the data of the first FFT with only 33 new data The third data block still covers 33 of the first data block and 67 of the second data block and so on Fig 5 19 Overlapping FFTs In Manual or Auto FFT mode an FFT length of 4096 and a window length of 4096 or the record length if shorter is used to calculate the spectrum Combining results trac
80. external generator control is active see Source State on page 98 Wier zs Spectrum i Input Source Power Sensor Tracking Generator 1 Measurement Configuration Interface Configuration Source Calibration Calibrate TMansmiSSiO Faria adidas 101 Calibrate Reflection SHOT didas 101 Calibrate Reflection Ope EE 101 elt ee Me e e n UE 101 ni ecl REEL TM 101 SAVE AS e EE 102 Reference POSITION BEE 102 Reference Valle cui aia 102 Data Input and Output Settings Calibrate Transmission Starts a transmission type measurement to determine a reference trace This trace is used to calculate the difference for the normalized values For details see chapter 5 4 4 4 Calibration Mechanism on page 52 Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 222 Calibrate Reflection Short Starts a short circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for calibration If both calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the calibration trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements The order of the two calibration meas urements is irrelevant Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 222 Selects the reflection method SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 221 Starts the sweep for short circuit calibration Calibrate Reflection Open Starts an open circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for calibration If both r
81. float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt lt IQ gt lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt UO Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed UO data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 QI 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 O 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 Q 2 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi l Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 UO Data File Format iq tar Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels
82. frequency level one for each sweep point The measured offsets can then be used as calibration factors for subsequent measurement results The calibration can be performed using either transmission or reflection measure ments The selected type of measurement used to determine the reference trace is included in the reference dataset Normalization Once the measurement setup has been calibrated and the reference trace is available subsequent measurement results can be corrected according to the calibration factors if necessary This is done by subtracting the reference trace from the measurement results This process is referred to as normalization and can be activated or deactiva ted as required If normalization is activated NOR is displayed in the channel bar next to the indication that an external generator is being used Ext Gen The normal ized trace from the calibration sweep is a constant O dB line as calibration trace reference trace 0 As long as the same settings are used for measurement as for calibration the normal ized measurement results should not contain any inherent frequency or power distor tions Thus the measured DUT values are very accurate Approximate normalization As soon as any of the calibration measurement settings are changed the stored refer ence trace will no longer be identical to the new measurement results However if the measurement settings do not deviate too much the measur
83. gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the index lt n gt This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRT View or MSRT Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet lt Offset gt This setting is only available for applications in MSRT mode not for the MSRT Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range pretrigger time to min posttrigger time sweep time RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 139 10 8 Retrieving Results The following commands can be used to retrieve the results of the UO Analyzer mea surement Retrieving Results 10 8 1 Storing large amounts of UO data When storing large amounts of UO data to a file consider the following tips to improve performance e H capturing and storing the I Q data is the main goal of the measurement and eval uation functions are not required use the basic HO data acquisition mode see TRACe IQ STATe
84. gt Range 3dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 132 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower Level This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is available for the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 and the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters Level Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event In the UO Analyzer application only EXTernall is supported Suffix port Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5 V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 131 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If
85. harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 187 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Note For the following measurements the YIG Preselector is off by default if available UO Analyzer and thus in all applications in MSRA operating mode Realtime and thus in all applications in MSRT operating mode Multi Carrier Group Delay GSM VSA Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 187 Input Connector Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF INPUT connector default or the optional BASEBAND INPUT connector This setting is only available if the Ana log Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input It is not avail able for the R amp S FSW67 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual R
86. high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 254 Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings How data is to be acquired is configured in the Bandwidth dialog box Data ACUSA aaa ind 134 O SWEEP ICI iii rta car dd Ad dt 140 Data Acquisition The data acquisition settings define which parts of the input signal are captured for fur ther evaluation in the applications They are configured in the Data Acquisition tab of the Bandwidth dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Bandwidth button in the configuration Overview e Select the BW key and then the Data Acquisition softkey e Select the Data Acquisition softkey in the I Q Analyzer menu Bandwidth Spectrum TD SCDMA BTS IQ Analyzer 1 Data Acquisition Sweep Data Acquisition Arr now Transformation T Ke Algorithm ABW Advanced Fourier Transformation Params Maximum Bandwidth ED so uz 160 mu MAA Flattop amplitude acc Meas Time s Window Length 4096 Record Length Visualization Swap I Q Frequency Resolution RBW Fig 6 4 Data acquisition settings with advanced FFT parameters Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings MSRA MSRT operating
87. it is not necessary to set a common mode offset compensation Clipping effects due to incorrect common mode offset The R amp S RT ZD10 20 30 probe measures only differential input signals Common mode signals are suppressed by the probe Therefore the common mode offset com pensation is not directly visible in the result display An incorrect common mode offset compensation can lead to unwanted clipping effects Measuring the common mode input voltage using the R amp S ProbeMeter is a convenient way to detect breaches of the operating voltage window For more information on common mode offset see the R amp S RT ZD10 20 30 User Man ual A common mode offset is only configurable in remote control see SENSe PROBe lt ch gt SETup CMOFfset on page 198 Basics on External Generator Control Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used for external genera tor control is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set tings 0 5 4 4 1 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output External generator control is only available in the Spectrum I Q Analyzer Analog Demodulation and Noise Figure applications e External Generator Connechons ennemis 48 e Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option 50 e Generator Setup Eiles nennen nnne nnne nh ia rn nnns 52 e Calibration E E E 52 6 NOR el DEEG 53 e Reference Trace Reference Line and Referenc
88. key in the Input dialog box InputSource Power Sensor Frequency Digital IQ Input Sample Rate Cam Manual d e Leve mmm mmm e Yes IQR100 101165 Digital IQ OUT Samp ate 10 MHz Full Scale Level 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW l Q Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Digital VQ Biet 91 INPUESaMPlS TEE 91 an ees cE e E da 92 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level eene 92 Connected Instrument 92 Di UE 92 Digital UO Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 188 Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital UO signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device Data Input and Output Settings The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIO SRATe on page 193 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 193 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an UO sam ple with the magnitude 1 If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connec ted device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on p
89. level pairs A maximum of 50 frequency level pairs may be entered Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 210 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Freq gt numeric value The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order lt Level gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL DATA 1MHZ 30DB 2MHZ 40DB Manual operation See Position Value on page 90 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic lt HarmOrder gt This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 210 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 65 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 89 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer lt Type gt This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assig
90. lt NoOfBins gt integer value Range 3 to 524288 RST 4096 Example IQ FFT LENG 2048 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See FFT Length on page 138 SENSe IQ FFT WINDow LENGth lt NoOfFFT gt Defines the number of samples to be included in a single FFT window when multiple FFT windows are used Parameters lt NoOfFFT gt integer value Range 3 to 1001 RST 1001 Example IQ FFT WIND LENG 500 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Window Length on page 139 SENSe IQ FFT WINDow OVERIap Rate Defines the part of a single FFT window that is re calculated by the next FFT calcula tion Parameters Rate double value Percentage rate Range 0 to 1 RST 0 75 Example IQ FFT WIND OVER 0 5 Half of each window overlaps the previous window in FFT calcu lation Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Window Overlap on page 139 SENSe IQ FFT WINDow TYPE Function In the UO Analyzer you can select one of several FFT window types Parameters Function BLACkharris Blackman Harris FLATtop Flattop GAUSsian Gauss RECTangular Rectangular P5 5 Term RST FLAT Example IQ FFT WIND TYPE GAUS Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Window Function on page 139 SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded IQ pairs should be swapped I lt gt Q before being processed Swapping and Q inverts th
91. lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters lt Trace gt Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker Position X value on page 153 IO Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 154 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt lt State gt This command links normal marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker lt m2 gt If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2 gt marker lt m1 gt changes its hori zontal position to the same value Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links marker 4 to marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 153 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt S
92. moved but it can be as long as the selected spectrum remains within the maximum analysis bandwidth see chapter 5 3 4 Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Analog Baseband signals on page 42 Low IF mode I or Q In low IF mode the real signal from the selected input component I or Q is assumed to be a modulated carrier with a specific center frequency The signal is down conver ted to a selected center frequency low IF frequency using an NCO The center fre quency must be higher than 0 Hz so that no part of the negative mirrored spectrum lies within the analysis bandwidth The center frequency must be different to 0 Hz as in this case real baseband mode is assumed see Real baseband mode I or Q only on page 42 The selected center frequency should also be selected such that the displayed spectrum remains within the maximum analysis bandwidth see chap ter 5 3 4 Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Analog Baseband signals on page 42 S f BW nax 2 f B 2 B 2 fo BW max 2 Fig 5 12 Spectrum in low IF mode Compared to the initial complex baseband signal that was input the down converted or Q component contains only half the spectrum i e one sideband less after passing the filter The power is thus reduced by one half or 3 dB This power loss is compen sated for by increasing the power of the resulting spectrum by 3 dB The digitized data is brought to the desired sample rate using a downsampling filter a
93. next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 156 See Search Next Peak on page 159 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 159 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 156 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum AUTO lt State gt This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace minimum on and off The R amp S FSW performs the peak search after each sweep Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK MIN AUTO ON Activates the automatic minimum value search function for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep IO Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 156 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event Manual operation
94. on page 234 Drop Out Time Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Slope Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger SLOPe on page 235 How to Work With a Power Sensor The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to set up a power sensor For details on individual functions and settings see chapter 6 4 2 2 Power Sensor Set tings on page 105 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap ter 10 4 1 8 Working with Power Sensors on page 225 Power sensors can also be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level e g from a signal generator This is described in How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External PSE Trigger on page 111 How to Set Up a Power Sensor Up to 4 external power sensors can be configured separately and used for precise power measurement as a trigger or both All power sensors can be activated and deactivated individually The following procedure describes in detail how to configure and activate power sen sors 10 11 12 Data Input and Output Settings To display the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box do one of the following e Select Input from the Overview e Sele
95. one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 148 IO Analysis DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous State This command turns an automatic reset of a trace on and off after a parameter has changed The reset works for trace modes min hold max hold and average Note that the command has no effect if critical parameters like the span have been changed to avoid invalid measurement results Parameters lt State gt ON The automatic reset is off OFF The automatic reset is on RST OFF Example DISP WIND TRAC3 MODE HCON ON Switches off the reset function Manual operation See Hold on page 149 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Tra
96. only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 201 Auto ID Threshold Defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison Auto ID on page 85 function The input range is between 0 1 dB and 100 dB Values of about 10 dB i e default set ting generally yield satisfactory results Remote command SENSe MIXer THReshold on page 201 Bias Settings Define the bias current for each range which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s The trace is adapted to the settings immediately so you can check the results To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table select the Write to lt CVL table name gt button Remote command SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW on page 200 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH on page 200 Data Input and Output Settings Write to lt CVL table name gt Bias Settings Stores the bias setting in the currently selected Conversion loss table for the range see Managing Conversion Loss Tables on page 86 If no conversion loss table is selected yet this function is not available
97. or data output using the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 a message is displayed in the status bar When data acqui sition errors occur a status bit in the STATus QUESTionable SYNC register is also Set Errors concerning the Digital Baseband Interface connection between instruments are indicated by a status bit in the STATus QUESTionable DIOQ register See chap ter 10 10 Querying the Status Registers on page 319 The following tables describe the most common errors and possible solutions Table 9 1 I Q data acquisition errors using the Digital Baseband Interface B17 and possible solu tions Message Possible solutions Sample rate too high in respect to e Reduce the sample rate input sample rate Increase the input sample rate See table 5 5 Sample rate too low in respect to e Increase the sample rate input sample rate e Reduce the input sample rate See table 5 5 Number of IQ Capture samples too e Reduce the number of UO samples to capture high e Decrease the sample rate or increase the input sample rate to reduce the ratio of sample rate input sample rate Keyword DATA ERR e Re establish the Digital UO connection NOTE If this error is indicated repeatedly either the Digital UO LVDS connection cable or the receiving or transmitting device might be defect Keyword PLL UNLOCKED e Re establish the Digital UO connection after the clock from the input device has been restore
98. rate of 600 MHz at the maximum bandwidth of 500 MHz if you change the bandwidth between 480 MHz and 500 MHz the sample rate is adapted according to the relationship Output sample rate Usable I Q bandwidth 0 833 On the other hand if you decrease the sample rate under 600 MHz the UO band width is adapted according to the regular relationship of Usable I Q bandwidth 0 8 Output sample rate 5 2 Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 1 Q bandwidths for RF input Usable UO bandwidth MHz 500 Activated option zu ON MN E DS B500 m E y a H ATI ARA TT AA NN RR kal Iw Output sample 200 280 360 440 520 600 10000 rate fout MHz Fig 5 7 Relationship between maximum usable l Q bandwidth and output sample rate for active R amp S FSW B500 MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode with active B500 bandwidth extension the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Table 5 4 Maximum record length with activated HO bandwidth extension option B500 Sample rate Maximum record length 100 Hz to 10 GHz 440 MSamples Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Alternatively to capturing analog UO data from the standard RF Input connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW digital UO data can be captured from the optional Dig ital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 if installed Furthermore the UO data p
99. see Analysis Bandwidth on page 135 Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 250 Digital I Q Trigger Source Trigger Source For applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applica tions and only if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector In the selection list you must specify which general purpose bit GPO to GP5 will provide the trigger data Note If the Digital UO enhanced mode is used i e the connected device supports transfer rates up to 200 Msps only the general purpose bits GPO and GP1 are available as a Digital UO trigger source See also Digital UO enhanced mode on page 34 A Trigger Offset and Slope on page 132 can be defined for the Digital IQ trigger to improve the trigger stability but no hysteresis or holdoff value The following table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS connector pins For details on the LVDS connector see chapter A 1 Description of the LVDS Connec tor on page 334 Table 6 2 Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins Bit LVDS pin GPO SDATAA P Trigger1 GP1 SDATA4_P Trigger2 GP2 SDATAO P Reserve1 GP3 SDATAA P Reserve2 GPA SDATAO P Marker1 GP5 SDATAA P Marker2 not available for Digital UO enhanced mode Remote command
100. see TRACe 10 SET on page 262 for all available trigger sources except for Free Run TRACe IQ EGATe State This command turns gated measurements with the UO analyzer on and off Before you can use the command you have to turn on the l Q analyzer and select an external or IF power trigger source Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example TRAC IQ EGAT ON Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements TRACe IQ EGATe GAP Samples This command defines the interval between several gate periods for gated measure ments with the UO analyzer Parameters Samples numeric value Max 440 MS sample rate 200MHz 1 pretrigger samples defined by TRACe TO SET sample rate defined by TRACe 10 SRATe Range 1 Max samples RST 1 Example TRAC IQ EGAT GAP 2 TRACe IQ EGATe LENGth lt GateLength gt This command defines the gate length for gated measurements with the I Q analyzer Defines the gate length in samples in edge mode For details see chapter 10 4 4 3 Configuring UO Gating on page 254 Parameters lt GateLength gt lt numeric value gt Max 440 MS sample rate 200MHz 1 pretrigger samples defined by TRACe 10 SET sample rate defined by TRACe 10 SRATe Range 1 Max samples RST 100 Example TRAC IQ EGAT LENG 2000 TRACe IQ EGATe NOFgateperiods Number This command defines the number of gate periods after the trigger signal for gated measuremen
101. see didi RF Power sisisi x130 Scale Config 211223 Ee E Select E Single Sweep Sweep count MN cuac Trace 1 2 3 4 Trace Config fees Trigger COMING oerte a Trigger e Liria Upper Level Hysteresis sg VISO ET P Sort mode Pak liSE ere rece tees 160 Source offset External generator vivio eterne 98 Source power External generator ttes 98 Specifics for V elle Hiel 75 Spectrum re EE 17 VQ Evaluation method tr 17 SRate hardware setting A 12 Status Digital Baseband Interface B17 Icons Status bar Error messages external generator 58 Status registers Queryitig ee EH 319 STAT QUES POW ains 186 STATus QUEStionable DIQ 319 322 STATus QUEStionable SYNC A 320 Step size Ec E T o 155 Markers remote control A 291 Suffixes COMMON T 179 Remote commands oricind 176 cem 137 REMOTE T 260 Sweep AbOttilig BEE A cnr eee itn ettet gees Performing remote Points VQ Analyzer eot ote eme Settings tren i ee cene TIME Mot nior rer terere Sweeps Reverse external generator ssusss 57 T TCP IP Address External generator ssssssssss 97 External genetrator iere deer ter heresis 96 Threshold Peak Seal cerei re Eeer See 157 Time trigger epes eseou crore tetto rhe ios 131 inc D 131 TPIS ek 264
102. select up to six displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 11 Exit the SmartGrid mode 12 Start a new sweep with the defined settings How to Export and Import UO Data 8 2 4 How to Output UO Data via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 0 8 3 O The I Q data processed by the I Q Analyzer can also be output to the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 if installed The digital input and output cannot be used simultaneously 10 Connect the device to which digital output will be provided to the DIGITAL BASEBAND OUTPUT connector at the rear of the R amp S FSW Press the INPUT OUTPUT key on the front panel of the R amp S FSW Select Output Config and switch to the Digital IQ tab to configure the Digital Baseband output Information on the detected output device is shown under Connected Instrument The output settings only become available once a device has been detected Set the state of the Digital Baseband Output to On If the maximum sample rate displayed for the detected output device is lower than the currently defined sample rate for the I Q Analyzer press the MEAS CONFIG key and select Data Acquisition to change the Sample Rate setting Select the Frequency button to define the center frequency for the measurement Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for exam
103. setting is mandatory The ACL extension is automatically appended during storage Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 210 Data Input and Output Settings Comment An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table The comment can be freely defined by the user Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent on page 208 Band The waveguide or user defined band for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 10 2 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BAND on page 206 Harmonic Order The harmonic order of the range for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic on page 209 Bias The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s Tip You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the changed setting is displayed see Bias Settings on page 85 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 207 Mixer Name Specifies the nam
104. signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 For details see the description of the STATus OPERation register in the R amp S FSW User Manual and the description of the AUX port in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 253 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 253 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 254 6 8 6 8 1 Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant
105. softkey in the SETUP menu For more information on transducers see the General Instrument Setup gt Transduc ers section in the R amp S FSW User Manual This function is only available if Source Calibration Normalize is switched on Note Note that the normalized measurement data is used not the reference trace Thus if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration without changing any settings the transducer factor will be 0 dB for the entire span by definition of the nor malized trace Remote command SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator on page 223 Reference Position Defines the position of the Result Frequency Stop in percent of the total y axis range The top of the diagram is 100 the bottom is 0 By default the O dB line is displayed at the top of the diagram 100 This setting is only available if normalization is on see Source Calibration Normalize on page 101 The reference line defined by the reference value and reference position is similar to the Reference Level defined in the Amplitude settings However this reference line only affects the y axis scaling in the diagram it has no effect on the expected input power level or the hardware settings The normalized trace 0 dB directly after calibration is displayed on this reference line indicated by a red line in the diagram If you shift the reference line the normalized trace is shifted as well Remote command DISPlay
106. stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt UO Data File Format iq tar A 4 1 1 Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the UO parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RsIqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample UO parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename
107. tene oce e e PEU ep WU ad 259 EISE Ve Ra Wl ae el BEE 259 SENSe IO FFTWINDOW OVERIAp cocoa ici 260 SENSe IQ FFT WINDow TYPE SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH DE SENSE Ke ETH e EE SENSe MIXer FREQuency HAN Deet cc coi A 202 Ei Ee lee ene 202 SENSE MIXE FREQUEN y STOP arns cric iat deca iit a x a M c ia ADE 202 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRE S Etsisin ireset pente raten ia 202 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BANDE VALUe 2 ennt ene e ri ter te tni irre rent RER 203 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGHBE STAT trn trt n tte tai t e e n ER Ren 203 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGF VALte siint ion knee Fea iii Eed 204 SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE iios teret rrr tt ra eh Rennen rh i re re etae Eee ea E iaa SENSe MIXer HARMonic LO EE E Elte ee SENSe MIXer ee E EE EI E le e Ree ET DEE SENSE MIXen Ke E Ee E ISENSe le E OSS Be EE EIB PORT E SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATEe z SENSe MIXer SIGNE EE SENSe MIXer THReshold oc at SENSE IMIXEM STATE aa da SENSe MSRA GAP T re OFF Set E SENSe PMETersp gt DOYCle VALUE oret rr rennen rr a raid SENSe PMETersps DOYCleE STAT eros iret Roh c rit e a e ceo cR ara deser SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency SENSe PMETer p FREQuency LINK iro on err tet rrr rennen rede spas 230 SENSe PMETSrspsMITIMS eite ee p toc eu e dere aca 231 SENSe PMETer sp MTIMe AVERage COUNL rerit een rcnt eror ro rene 231 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STA
108. test DUT and a signal and spectrum analyzer Therefore it is useful to measure the attenuation or gain caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the signal analyzer in advance The known level offsets can then be removed from the measure ment results in order to obtain accurate information on the DUT Calculating the difference between the currently measured power and a reference trace is referred to as calibration Thus the measurement results from the controlled external generator including the inherent distortions can be used as a reference trace to calibrate the measurement setup The inherent frequency and power level distortions can be determined by connecting the R amp S FSW to the signal generator The R amp S FSW sends a predefined list of fre quencies to the signal generator see also chapter 5 4 4 7 Coupling the Frequencies on page 55 The signal generator then sends a signal with the specified level at each frequency in the predefined list The R amp S FSW measures the signal and deter mines the level offsets to the expected values R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing A lt A lt A lt A lt lt A gt gt gt gt _ _ 6 Cw d e 5 4 4 5 Saving calibration results A reference dataset for the calibration results is stored internally as a table of value pairs
109. that provides analog baseband data modulated on a carrier frequency to the BASEBAND INPUT connector at the front of the R amp S FSW 2 Press the INPUT OUTPUT key on the front panel of the R amp S FSW 3 Select the Input Source Config button to configure the Radio Frequency signal source 4 Set the state of the Radio Frequency signal source to On 5 As the Input Connector select Baseband Input I 6 Select the Amplitude button to define the attenuation reference level or other set tings that affect the input signal s amplitude and scaling 7 Select the Frequency button to define the input signal s center frequency 8 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an IQ Power trigger to start capturing data only when a specific power is exceeded 9 Select the Bandwidth button and define the bandwidth parameters for data acqui sition e Sample rate or Analysis Bandwidth the span of the input signal to be cap tured for analysis or the rate at which samples are captured both values are correlated e Optionally if R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 is installed the Maximum Band width depending on whether you require a larger or smaller bandwidth e Measurement Time how long the data is to be captured e Record Length the number of samples to be captured also defined by sam ple rate and measurement time 10 Select the Display Config button and
110. the record length number of samples to capture to 1000 samples RAC IQ BWID i El Queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter determined by the sample rate LAY ADD 1 RIGH FREQ Spectrum display in window 2 to the right of Magnitude results LAY ADD 1 BEL RIMAG Real I display in window 3 below Magnitude results TRAC IQ AVER ON Defines averaging for the magnitude trace of I component TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Defines an average over 10 sweeps DISP TRAC1 MODE WRIT DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC3 MODE MINH Changes the trace modes INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished TRAC TO DATA FORM IQBL TRAC IQ DATA Retrieves the captured I samples 1000 values followed by the captured Q samples 1000 values O samples are all 0 because of I Q mode Low IF TRAC2 DATA TRACE1 Returns the power levels for each sample y values from Spectrum display Programming Examples TRAC2 DATA X TRACE1 Returns the frequency for each sample x values from Spectrum display Description of the LVDS Connector A Annex Reference A 1 Description of the LVDS ConnectoOF cooooooccconnninnconnnnocnoncnnananornrnnannnonrnnanarorennnanennnnn 334 A 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format 335 A 3 Reference Format Description for UO Data FileS ccccceesseeeeeeesseeeeeeesseeeeenes 336 A 4 VQ Data File
111. trace mode Manual operation See Detector on page 149 TRACe lt n gt COPY lt TraceNumber gt lt TraceNumber gt This command copies data from one trace to another IO Analysis Parameters lt TraceNumber gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 lt TraceNumber gt The first parameter is the destination trace the second parame ter is the source Example TRAC COPY TRACel1 TRACe2 Copies the data from trace 2 to trace 1 Usage SCPI confirmed SENSe AVERage COUNt lt AverageCount gt TRACe IQ AVERage COUNt lt NumberSets gt This command defines the number of UO data sets that the averaging is based on Parameters lt NumberSets gt Range 0 to 32767 RST 0 Example TRAC IQ ON Switches on acquisition of UO data TRAC IQ AVER ON Enables averaging of the UO measurement data TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Selects averaging over 10 data sets TRAC 10 DATA Starts the measurement and reads out the averaged data SENSe AVERage lt n gt STATe lt t gt State TRACe IQ AVERage STATe State This command turns averaging of the UO data on and off Before you can use the command you have to turn the I Q data acquisition on with TRACe IQ STATe If averaging is on the maximum amount of UO data that can be recorded is 512kS 524288 samples Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example TRAC IQ ON Switches on acquisition of UO data TRAC IQ AVER ON Enables averaging of the UO
112. 1 TRAC DATA TRACE2 TRAC DATA TRACE3 Returns the magnitude for each sweep point Converting an RF Signal to a Digital UO Signal via the Digital Base band Interface R amp S FSW B17 In the following example an RF signal is measured at the RF input and then output as digital UO data via the Digital Baseband Interface which requires R amp S FSW option B17 The following signal is to be measured Table 10 4 Signal parameters for programming example carrier frequency 5GHz peak power 10 dBm bandwidth 22MHz Note For a bandwidth of 22 MHz a sampe rate of 27 5 MHz is required Table 10 5 Required I Q data acquisition parameters for TRAC IQ SET command Filter type Normal Sample Rate 27 5 MHz 10 11 5 Programming Examples Trigger Source External Trigger Slope Positive Pretrigger Samples 0 Number of Samples 1000 Ji Preparing the instrument RST Sets the instrument to a defined default status FREQ CENT 5GHz Sets the center frequency to 5 GHz DISP TRAC1 Y RLEV 10dBm Sets the reference level to 10 dBm TRACE IQ STATE ON Enables acquisition of I Q data TRAC IQ SET NORM 50MHz 27 5MHz EXT POS 0 1000 Configures the measurement Only the sample rate and trigger source settings are relevant to the digital baseband interface The other parameters can be set to their default values as listed above OUTPUT DIQ ON Ena
113. 100 Hz to 200 MHz proportional up to maximum 160 MHz 200 MHz to 10 GHz 160 MHz Usable UO bandwidth UO bandwidths for RF input MHz Activated option PTET tT PIP Pp rum 140 MEN i20 LL REN 100 aa Dption B80 USO 80 or deactivated obtion B160 U160 70 BE 60 RR 50 EE Ve EE Option B40 U40 30 Lk LLLA LEEELEELEELELLELLLL EE LA LLL EL LE LELLLDLLELLLI MEAM 10 4 extension options ALII CL LLL i i or B8 20 Output sample 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 10000 rate fo MHz Fig 5 5 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate with and with out bandwidth extensions Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input 5 1 1 1 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated UO Bandwidth Extension Option B320 U320 Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 400 MHz proportional up to maximum 320 MHz 400 MHz to 10 GHz 320 MHz E Digital Baseband output If Digital Baseband output is active see Digital Baseband Output on page 115 the sample rate is restricted to 200 MHz max 160 MHz usable UO bandwidth Usable UO UO bandwidths for RF input MHz Activated option LEE EE ELLEEELL IL EL A peer E 44 EE LLEEEELEELLLLLLLLL EE 40 80 120 160 200 240 Output sample 280 320 360 400 10000 rate fo MHz Fig 5 6 Relationship between maximum usable l Q bandwidth and output sample rate for active R amp S FSW B320 Processing
114. 20 U320 requires a reference board revision 3 14 or higher The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 requires a reference board 1312 8075 06 revision 4 06 or higher and a motherboard 1313 4180 02 or 1313 7698 02 As a rule the usable UO bandwidth is proportional to the output sample rate Yet when the UO bandwidth reaches the bandwidth of the analog IF filter at very high output sample rates the curve breaks Relationship between sample rate record length and usable UO bandwidth Up to the maximum bandwidth the following rule applies Usable LO bandwidth 0 8 Output sample rate Regarding the record length the following rule applies Record length Measurement time sample rate Maximum record length for RF input The maximum record length that is the maximum number of samples that can be cap tured depends on the sample rate For activated option B320 or U320 see table 5 3 For activated option B500 see table 5 4 Table 5 1 Maximum record length without HO bandwidth extension options B320 U320 B500 Sample rate Maximum record length 100 Hz to 200 MHz 440 MSamples precisely 461373440 440 1024 1024 samples 200 MHz to 10 GHz 220 MSamples upsampling MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input Digital Baseband output If Digital Baseband output is active see Di
115. 2MHz EXT POS 100 4096 Measurement configuration Sample Rate 32 MHz Trigger Source External Trigger Slope Positive Pretrigger Samples 100 Number of Samples 4096 INIT WAI Starts measurement and wait for sync FORMat REAL 32 Determines output format To read the results TRAC IQ DATA MEM Reads all 4096 UO data TRAC IQ DATA MEM 0 2048 Reads 2048 UO data starting at the beginning of data acquisition TRAC IQ DATA MEM 2048 1024 Reads 1024 l Q data from half of the recorded data TRAC IQ DATA MEM 100 512 Reads 512 UO data starting at the trigger point Pretrigger Samples was 100 Usage Query only Retrieving UO Trace Data In addition to the raw captured UO data the results from UO analysis as shown in the result displays can also be retrieved O escasa gir ed or bua te das Re ede idea p coa gent 312 FORMSUEDEXPORTIDSEPSEeIOE A a a ead 313 TRACI DATA ii od 313 KREE KEE 314 TRAGOS DATA TAS A AAA AAA AA 315 FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Retrieving Results Parameters lt Format gt ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual
116. 39 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet airea nnne 239 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALue essen nnne teretes trennen nnns BISPlayEWINDowsnP TRAGest MODE 5 ren a ito ae zy eo dana DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtIOQUOUS enne r nente 284 DISPlay WINDowsn TRACES STATe sioe beret teta tee nnnc edite ssa tha etin incen 284 BISPlayEWINDowsnP ZOOM AREA rrt rere carere ere t Pre cre rto cir ret e Ee per eo Fra gege 302 DISPlayEWINDow n ZOOM MULTipleszoom AREA ettet eire coe dete eerie cte vta CR ecd 303 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt szoom gt STA TB nennen nnne 204 DISPlayEWINBDowsn ZOOM STA RE 303 FET CH PME Mrs DA caca aa AA tae Ad EES 229 FORMat DEXPort DSEP AO ais ia sd 313 FORMat DATA INITiate CONMeas IN Nee HR UTC 277 INiTiateREFROS isidro a aaa 306 ll ele ee 278 ll ele E 279 INiTiate SEQuencer e E EE 279 INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL 280 INI Tate T MMediate eet eee E te Der rte tho Fe oe nnt uten cdrom eet EES Eug 278 INPUEAT TONO EE Es 239 INPUt ATTENUAtION AUTO WEE 240 INPut AT Tenuation PRO Tection RESOL arisa iii ida 186 INPUECGONN e ero ee cae 186 INPUT COU PIG DEE INPut DIQ CDEVice INPUE DIQ RANGE GOUPIING i t rh rtt er rente ree n A eE Aaa 192 INPut DIG RANGe UPPer E 192 INP
117. 4 Softkey Calibrate Reflection Open remote control 222 Calibrate Reflection Short remote control 222 Calibrate Transmission remote control 24222 Normalize remote control essssss 223 Softkeys Atmiplit de Conflg ici rennes 116 ppp ae 143 Auto Freg eoim tos 143 Auto Level 144 BB POWER center hr m ortae CC 129 Capture Offset 139 Genter nne 25125 Center Mkr Freg i i rehenes 159 Continue Single SWEEP rennes 142 Continuous Sweep 2 141 DiglGOHlf annia hte eerte recie 92 Digital 1 Q 2 130 Display Config 142 EXPO cion rir re Re n ees 76 External aut ei eed qur 128 Froo TEE 128 Frequency Config 2129 UO Power 129 IF Power xi 129 IMPON EE 76 Input Source Config E 77 IQ EXPO EE 76 IQ Import sico kira 76 Lower Level Hysteresis Marker Config sico trente Marker t Trac socio aci 153 Meastime Auto 144 Meastime Manual 144 Mismas 29159 Next Min 4 199 Next Peak vs 159 Norm Delt rrr teet rite 153 Outputs Config sisisi rieniras 111 F ek genge 5 199 Power Sensor sa 191 Power Sensor Config 105 Cl S 120 Ref Level s XN 121 Ref Level Offset see 118 121 bettel curia 159 Repetition interval 23 191 RF Atten Auto s 119 RF Atten Manual
118. 4 2 2 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements CAL Culate lt n gt UNIT POWer Unit This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all measurement windows Parameters lt Unit gt DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Manual operation See Unit on page 118 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 117 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 118 Configuring the Attenuation INPUEATT EUA erue te ten erede a aa a AE RAN ERRRMDRA Rie E 239 INPUtATTenuat nsAU TO od aec eit peat a pede xe Resa 240 INPUCEA EE 240 INPUEEATT AUTO aun aaa 241 dy std REN EE 241 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see INPut EATT STATe on page 241 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coup
119. 535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only 10 10 2 STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register This register contains information about the state of the digital UO input and output This register is available with option Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 The status of the STATus QUESTionable DIO register is indicated in bit 14 of the STATus QUESTionable register You can read out the state of the register with STATus QUEStionable DIO CONDition on page 324 and STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt on page 325 For more information on the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 see chap ter 5 2 Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 on page 30 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data Bit No Meaning Digital UO Input Device connected This bit is set if a device is recogni
120. 5dBm Set the bias current to 1 mA SENS MIX BIAS LOW 1mA f f9299 5 9 9 Configuring the mixer and band settings Use band V to full possible range extent for assigned harmonic 6 SENS MIX HARM BAND V SENS MIX RFOV ON Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Use a 3 port mixer type SENS MIX PORT 3 Split the frequency range into two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 average conv loss of 20 dB range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS LOW 20dB SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB 1 Activating automatic signal identification functions Activate both automatic signal identification functions SENS MIX SIGN ALL Use auto ID threshold of 8 dB SENS MIX THR 8dB Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data for the input signal without distortions default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACE3 Configuring a conversion loss table for a user defined band eege Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument 10 4 1 6 Configuring UO Analyzer Measur
121. 8 e Character SUIS TEE 179 BOCK RE EE 179 10 1 6 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command 10 1 6 2 10 1 6 3 Introduction Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may
122. 9 Data Input and Output Settings State Switches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off Note that in addition to this general setting each power sensor can be activated or deactivated individually by the Select setting on each tab However the general setting overrides the individual settings Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe on page 232 Continuous Value Update If activated the power sensor data is updated continuously during a sweep with a long sweep time and even after a single sweep has completed This function cannot be activated for individual sensors If the power sensor is being used as a trigger see Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 108 continuous update is not possible this setting is ignored Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATe on page 233 Select Selects the individual power sensor for usage if power measurement is generally acti vated State function The detected serial numbers of the power sensors connected to the instrument are provided in a selection list For each of the four available power sensor indexes Power Sensor 1 Power Sensor 4 which correspond to the tabs in the configura tion dialog one of the detected serial numbers can be assigned The physical sensor is thus assigned to the configuration setting for the selected power sensor index By default serial numbers not yet assigned are automatically assigned
123. 90 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 289 Marker Usage Marker Position X value Defines the position x value of the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 291 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 289 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 290 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 289 Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results delta marker values Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF on page 288 Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers If the x axis value of the inital marker is changed the linked marker follows o
124. B relative measurements Usage Query only READ PMETer lt p gt This command initiates a power sensor measurement and queries the results Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Usage Query only SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATe lt State gt This command turns the duty cycle correction on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 108 SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle VALue lt Percentage gt This command defines the duty cycle for the correction of pulse signals Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements The power sensor uses the duty cycle in combination with the mean power to calculate the power of the pulse Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor Parameters lt Percentage gt Range 0 001 to 99 999 RST 99 999 Default unit Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Activates the duty cycle correction PMET2 DCYC VAL 0 5 Sets the correction value to 0 5 Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 108 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency lt Frequency gt This command defines the frequency of the power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Frequency gt The available value range is specified in the data sheet of the power sensor in use RST 50 MHz Example PMET2 FREQ 1GHZ Sets the frequency of the power sensor to 1 G
125. COUPIO UP 187 IESEL 187 INPut FIETer YIGESTATe coi ica 187 NPE IM PSG sini omic A a ed 188 INPURSE E iioa A a a A 188 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first For details on the protection mechanism see chapter 5 4 1 RF Input Protection on page 44 Usage Event INPut CONNector lt ConnType gt Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF input connector or the optional Analog Baseband connector This command is only available if the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Parameters lt ConnType gt RF RF input connector AIQI Analog Baseband connector RST RF Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Example INP CONN AIQI Selects the analog baseband input Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Connector on page 79 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input The command is not available for measurements with the Di
126. Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate SEQuencer ABORt on page 278 command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage SCPI confirmed INITiate CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using INIT CONT OFF or finished in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INITiate IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxh
127. EBBFT iii land 293 GAL Gulate MARKer X SLIMItS RIGHT 1 12i cine ooo NEESS ENEE ed 294 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits ZOOM STATe essere nennt 294 Ee DEN E e DEE 294 GALGulate THReshold S TAT6 tidie eene annt ENEE 295 CALCulate MARKer LOEXclude State This command turns the suppression of the local oscillator during automatic marker positioning on and off Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK LOEX ON CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion Excursion This command defines the peak excursion The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search The unit depends on the measurement Application Result display Unit Spectrum dB Manual operation IO Analysis See Peak Excursion on page 157 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer SEARch lt MarkReallmag gt This command selects the trace type a marker search is performed on Parameters lt MarkReallmag gt Example Manual operation REAL Marker search functions are performed on the real trace of the 1 Q measurement IMAG Marker search functions are performed on the imaginary trace of the 1 Q measurement MAGN Marker search functions are performed on the magnitude of the and Q data RST REAL CALC4 MARK SEAR IMAG See Branch for Peak Search on page 158 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATe lt State gt This command turns marker search limits on a
128. EI E UN BE 338 AAT UO Parameter XML File Gpechficatton rnnt trrrnneerrnnnr ennnen 339 A42 e Data Binary TEE 342 A 1 Description of the LVDS Connector The R amp S Digital Baseband Interface is a proprietary LVDS serial interface For adap tion to industrial standard interfaces use the R amp S EX IQ BOX see the R amp S EX IQ BOX External Signal Interface Module Manual The LVDS Connector is a 26 pin female 0 050 Mini D Ribbon connector e g 3M 102XX 1210VE series For the connection use the cables provided with the R amp S EX IQ BOX or an R8SOSMU Z6 cable order no 1415 0201 02 13 LY LUE E DUE RES Fig 1 1 LVDS connector on the R amp S FSW rear panel connector front view The table 1 1 shows the multiplexed data at the output of the LVDS transmitter Table 1 1 LVDS connector pin description Pin Signal Level Description 1 reserved for future use 2 GND OV Ground shield of pair 1 14 for future use 3 SDATO_P LVDS Serial data channel 0 positive pin carries the bits VALID ENABLE MARKER_1 GP4 Reserve_1 GP2 RE 0 RE 1 4 SDAT1 P LVDS Serial data channel 1 positive pin carries the bits RE 2 RE 3 RE 4 RE 5 RE 6 RE 7 5 SDAT2 P LVDS Serial data channel 2 positive pin carries the bits RE 8 RE 9 RE 10 RE 11 RE 12 RE 13 6 CLK1 P LVDS Clock 1 positive pin clock for transmission on LVDS link R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input EH A 2 Annex Refer
129. ER EE 218 SOURce EXTemal STATE oia ii a 218 SGOUlbce POWertL EVellt IMMedatelOtt Get 218 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements SOURce EXTernal FREQuency lt Frequency gt This command defines a fixed source frequency for the external generator Parameters lt Frequency gt Source frequency of the external generator RST 1100050000 Example SOUR EXT FREQ 10MHz Manual operation See Manual Source Frequency on page 99 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling STATe lt State gt This command couples the frequency of the external generator output to the R amp S FSW Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Default setting a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW the RF frequency range covers the currently defined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator OFF 0 The generator uses a single fixed frequency defined by SOURce EXTernal FREQuency RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ COUP ON Manual operation See Source Frequency Coupling on page 99 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator lt Value gt This command defines the denominator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded
130. F input configuration see Input Connector on page 79 The probe s attenuation is compensated automatically by the R amp S FSW using a trans ducer named Probe on Baseband Input The probe can only be connected on I as only input at the connector can be redirected to the RF path A comment is assigned that includes the type name and serial number of the detected probe The transducer is deleted as soon as the probe is disconnected For details on transducers see the General Instrument Setup section in the R amp S FSW User Manual For information on using probes for input see chapter 5 4 3 Using Probes on page 45 Using Probes As an alternative means of input to the R amp S FSW active probes from Rohde amp Schwarz can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Base band Interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed These probes allow you to perform voltage measurements very flexibly and precisely on all sorts of devices to be tested without interfering with the signal Connecting probes Probes are automatically detected when you plug them into the upper BASEBAND INPUT connectors on the front panel of the R amp S FSW The detected information on the probe is displayed in the Probes tab of the Input dialog box individually for each connector Single ended and differential probes Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is oc
131. FSW B17 In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB also using the rotary knob Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 239 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 240 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 If option R amp S FSW B25 is installed you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the
132. FSW can process both single ended unbalanced and differential balanced input The signal is input to the R amp S FSW via the connectors of the Analog Baseband Interface If necessary for instance if the con nections are mixed up or the data is inverted by the device under test the and Q val ues in the input can be swapped The A D converter samples the input at a rate of 200 MHz As a result 200 megasamples of values and 200 megasamples of Q val ues are obtained per second Voltage levels full scale level For RF input the maximum expected voltage level is defined by the reference level For analog baseband input the maximum expected voltage level for each component I or Q is defined by the full scale level The full scale level defines the maximum power you can input at the BASEBAND INPUT connector without clipping the signal The full scale level can be defined manually or automatically such that the power of and Q does not exceed the reference level User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 39 Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface If probes are connected the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed voltage For details on probes see chapter 5 3 Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface on page 37 When converting the measured voltage into dBm an impedance of 50 O is assumed Triggering The following trigger sources are supported for anal
133. For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 in real baseband mode the UO vector is a constant line as one component is 0 for all sweep points For more information see chapter 5 3 3 UO Processing Modes on page 40 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH VECT see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 270 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 313 Real Imag UO Displays the and Q values in separate diagrams User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 18 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Measurement and Result Displays MultiView Spectrum Spectrum 2 1Q Analyzer Ref Level 2 nu AQT 3 s SRate 32 0 MHz Att dB Freq 30 0 MHz RecLength 01 IRG IFP 07 9 e 1AP Clrw 1 Imag Real Imag 1 0 CF 30 0 MHz Note For analog baseband input in Real Baseband mode only one diagram is dis played for the selected component For details see Real baseband mode I or Q only on page 42 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH RIM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 270 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 313 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 155 Stimulus Function Function Result Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 270 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 291 CALCulate lt n gt MARK
134. Frequency Configuration remote esses 244 Configuration Softkey 2 aims 125 Coupling power sensor ipsini rrain 107 External generator IF OUl ee E POWer SENSOR iniciaran Frequency coupling Automatic external generator ssussssss 56 External generator ether 55 99 Reverse sweep external generator TTL synchronization external generator 57 Frequency denominator External generator nn et eer 99 Frequency numerator External generator vicio id 99 Frequency offset External generator eint 56 99 Frequency range Calibration sweep external generator 56 100 Frequency converting measurements Ale Ce 56 FRQ External generator ix ciar 58 F ll Scale level 7 brin nacre Aves eier cta 32 39 Analog Baseband B71 remote control Analog Baseband D Digital Wii rte tnr nens Digital UO remote pi Unit digital Q remote rn G Gating ebe E WEE 254 eier 128 Generator Frequencies external generator Frequency coupling external generator Frequency offset external generator Output power external generator 98 Generator type External e 96 Generators Frequency range external generator 97 Power range external generator 0 0 cece 97 Setup files external generator
135. Frequency gt The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 94 See Center frequency on page 125 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 244 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 125 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step s
136. Hz Manual operation See Frequency Manual on page 107 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency LINK lt Coupling gt This command selects the frequency coupling for power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Coupling gt CENTer Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer MARKer1 Couples the frequency to the position of marker 1 OFF Switches the frequency coupling off RST CENTer Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Example PMET2 FREQ LINK CENT Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer Manual operation See Frequency Coupling on page 107 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe lt Duration gt This command selects the duration of power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Duration gt SHORt NORMal LONG RST NORMal Example PMET2 MTIM SHOR Sets a short measurement duration for measurements of station ary high power signals for the selected power sensor Manual operation See Meas Time Average on page 107 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage COUNt lt NumberReadings gt This command sets the number of power readings included in the averaging process of power sensor measurements Extended averaging yields more stable results for power sensor measurements espe cially for measurements on signals with a low power because it minimizes the effects of noise Suffix lt p g
137. ING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SYSTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA or MSRT mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA MSRT applications Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all channels Usage Event SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepC
138. IODO iia n etes 132 250 Slope POWer SENSOM dek a ctr 109 Trigger level External trigger remote sesssss 249 1 Q Power remote wee 249 IF Power remote 249 RF Power remote 250 Trigger source 128 Analog Baseband rne 40 EIERE 129 Digital UO Exteiriall cine tratar Free Run 1 Q Power 129 IF Power 129 Power Sensor 20181 RF Power ss 190 Time 1381 MIS inepto 128 Troubleshooting VQ data acquisition 2 rre 173 1 Q data output Der Input OVerlOad 186 Overload external generator ooocccoinnccconocccccooccccnannnos 59 TTL handshake see TTL synchronization oooonnccninnnnncnnocccanncnananancnnnno 97 TTL synchronization AUX control external generator ssuss 48 External generator eeiam 48 57 97 U Units AS itae genee a ineat oee pare Sen Reference level Updating Result display remote sssssssss 306 Upper Level Hysteresis sini E 144 Usable UO bandwidth Definition User manuals User sample rate Detten iiia A 24 33 V Video ior Softkey VIGGO OULDUE ree erm rhet teret Ww Window functions Characteristics ascii ia 64 ET iios ntpote s 2589 Window title bar information eeeeeeees 12 Windows Adding
139. IQ Tee 199 a INPut IQ BALanced STATe lt State gt This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain UO signal via 2 simple ended lines Parameters lt State gt ON Differential OFF Simple ended RST ON Example INP IQ BAL OFF Manual operation See Input configuration on page 94 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the full scale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to INPut 10 FULLscale LEVel on page 196 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 122 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the full scale level is set to manual mode see 1NPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on page 196 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example INP IQ FULL 0 5V Manual operation See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 122 INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt This command defi
140. ISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Introduction Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 10 1 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If acommand supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e Numare Values oie aia ads 177 BOOIGAIN aaa 178 Character NEE 17
141. JADJ S HAL conan 266 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURalioh rior torni EEEa EEEE 266 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE etcetera annua naadi 267 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis L OWer usesesseeiee esee annaa 267 IGENZGe Aust CONEioure H Gteresles Uber 268 SENSe JADJust CONFigure TRlG oooocncccnccccccncononcnonnnnnnanannnn nana cana nannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nn r nnns 268 ie e EE 268 SENSe JADJUStEEVEL cocoa it t A cee 269 o a SENSe ADJust ALL This command initiates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically only once for the current measurement This includes e Reference level Example ADJ ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 143 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation lt Duration gt In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters lt Duration gt Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the
142. LIST SIZE lt MaxNoPeaks gt This command defines the maximum number of peaks that the R amp S FSW looks for during a peak search Parameters lt MaxNoPeaks gt Maximum number of peaks to be determined Range 1 to 200 RST 50 IO Analysis Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE LIST SIZE 10 The marker peak list will contain a maximum of 10 peaks Manual operation See Maximum Number of Peaks on page 160 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt SortMode gt This command selects the order in which the results of a peak search are returned Parameters lt SortMode gt X Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x axis Y Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y axis RST X Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT Y Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values Manual operation See Sort Mode on page 160 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STAT lt State gt This command turns a peak search on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE STAT ON Activates marker peak search Manual operation See Peak List State on page 160 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks X This command queries the position of the peaks on the x axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the x
143. MMEM ry LOADIQ STATO ua aa MMEMory STORe1O COMMent i sion a iaa 318 MMEMoOn STORE RER 318 MMEMor S TORO Tossa dio 317 MMEMory STORG PEAK ociosas diana di aaa 302 OUTPut DIQ ee ger EI 194 OUTIPULIFSF e e EE 237 OQUTPUEIFESQUR EE 236 e GEET LEE 237 QUTPut TRIGger lt port DIRGCHOM viril rata 252 OUTPUETRIGGEr lt port EE OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe OUTPut TRIGgersport PULSe IMMediate rrt rne tn ee te ne eres 254 QUTPUt TRIGgEr lt port gt PUL Se ENG oa oie eee reote Yan ea aret che Dv e s cr Pc eue Ee Ebene edi 254 READ PMET6r lt p gt TE 229 SOURce EX Termal FRE QUENCY cia te ere eni ee derer n RI a e E e e RE ER CE E XN ERR RE 216 SOURce EXTemal FREQuency COUPling S TATe 5 n ornatu tutu tnit rena optan ku 216 SOURCG EXTermal FREQUENCY OFF Set ertt n nre ari aea D ea ene EE Ye ER NER PEE eos 217 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator eese 216 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator sese 217 SOURce EXTernal POWerpLEVel rrt rmn err mtn ri i hr rri rri rr ERE o eaae 218 SOURce EXTernal ROSCIIlator SOU RC not rette etr herr reete tnn ern 219 e REITER RE 218 SOURce POWer EEVel IMMediate OFFSelt tco a a 218 STATUs QUEStionable DIQ CONDILOTI caa cott tt 324 STATus QUEStionabl DIQ ENABIO cocacola a tei iesu be deba Oei pk cedat rete 324 STAT s QUEStionable DI
144. N GEN SMUO1 Creates the transducer file C r_s instr trd SMU01 trd Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Save As Trd Factor on page 102 Programming Example for External Generator Control The following example demonstrates how to work with an external generator in a remote environment Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements It assumes a signal generator of the type SMUOA is connected to the R amp S FSW including TTL synchronization as described in chapter 5 4 4 1 External Generator Connections on page 48 RS Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Set the frequency span SENS FREQ STAR 10HZ SENS FREQ STOP 1MHZ Set the generator type to SMU04 with a frequency range of 100 kHz to 4GHz SYST COMM RDEV GEN TYPE SMUO4 Set the interface used to the GPIB address 28 SYST COMM RDEV GEN INT GPIB SYST COMM GPIB RDEV GEN ADDR 28 Activate the use of TTL synchronization to optimize measurement speed SYST COMM RDEV GEN LINK TTL Activate the use of the external reference frequency at 10 MHz on the generator SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Activate external generator control SOUR EXT STAT ON Set the generator output level to 10 dBm SOUR EXT POW 10DBM Set the frequency coupling to automatic SOUR EXT FREQ COUP STAT ON Define a series of frequencies one for each sweep point based on the current requency at the RF input of the analyzer the generator frequency is half the frequ
145. NSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet essen nono non 202 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue eese nennen nennen enne 203 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH ISTATe 2 i2 arti at ee cei ttu rd a iaa 203 ISGENGe Mixer HAbRMontc HIGH MAL ue 204 ISGENGe Mixer HAhMontcTbt nn nn nn nn 204 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements ISGENGe Mixer HAhRMontcL OW 204 SENSEI LOSSHIGH EE 205 SENS amp IMIXertOSS TABLESIHIGE Iii eege eege ence il EES 205 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW eene tette ettet ttt 205 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW eec tet tette tetti 205 SENSE Ke POR Peats 206 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe 1 eran enne rnnt nh nnn nente aene R RA Enn naa 206 SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover Frequency This command defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency for each band can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 200 Parameters Frequency numeric value Example MIX ON Activates the external mixer MIX FREQ HAND 78 0299GHz Sets the handover frequency to 78 0299 GHz Manual operation See Handover Freq on page 82 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt This command queries the frequency at which the ex
146. O Data from RF Input eene nen 21 Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 30 Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface 37 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output eeeeeseseess 44 UO Data Import and Export eeeseeeseseeeee essen enne nennen nnn nnne nn nnn trennen 62 B sics OM PE eG 63 UO Analyzer in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode eee 69 Measurements in the Time and Frequency Domain eene 70 COMIC AT ON a 72 Default Settings for UO Analyzer measurements eee 72 Configuration OverviGw 2 iiic iino eina niso ccu iaanucce rea sin cc ri san R RR Da RR RR RAP ERR EE 73 Import Export Functions irren tete ie 75 Data Input and Output SettiMgs cccocmmoonoonccnccnnnennnnnnnnnannnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnna enne nnn 76 Pi APA aid ecdeaseadescs 116 el Ce Eed Le CT 125 Trigger Settings miii ii 126 Data Acquisition and Bandwidth SettingS oommcoocoonccnnnninnnncccnnsenccnnnnarennnnnannnnnns 134 Display Configuratlon iet innen etienne ito eu enne rban enano aiia ena P apa n aD RIRs 142 Adjusting Settings Automatically sese nennen 142 Configuring an UO Analyzer as an MSRA MSRT Application 145
147. ODE is set to MAN Defines the resolution bandwidth The available RBW values depend on the sample rate and record length For details see chapter 5 6 4 Frequency Resolution of FFT Results RBW on page 67 Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST RBW AUTO mode is used Example IQ BAND MODE MAN Switches to manual RBW mode IQ BAND RES 120000 Sets the RBW to 120 kHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See RBW on page 137 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements SENSe IQ FFT ALGorithm Method Defines the FFT calculation method Parameters Method SINGIe One FFT is calculated for the entire record length if the FFT length is larger than the record length see SENSe IO FFT LENGth and TRACe TO RLENgth zeros are appended to the captured data AVERage Several overlapping FFTs are calculated for each record the results are averaged to determine the final FFT result for the record The user defined window length and window overlap are used see SENSe IQ FFT WINDow LENGth and SENSe IQ FFT WINDow OVERlap RST AVER Example IQ FFT ALG SING Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Transformation Algorithm on page 138 SENSe IQ FFT LENGth lt NoOfBins gt Defines the number of frequency points determined by each FFT calculation The more points are used the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes but the longer the calculation takes Parameters
148. OW oooccccccccnnnnccccncncccccononononnonannnanannnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nani 272 LAY OU REPLace WINDOW idas ti A A A 272 Beet Pl erica diia 273 LAYouEWINDOWsme ADD sio 274 EAY ou uk eeler 275 LAYO WINDOW SAA REMOVE cional 275 LAY out WINDOW NA REP EE 275 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a window to the display This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the TAYout REPLace WINDow command Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only Manual oper
149. PEaks SORT Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the x axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks Y This command queries the position of the peaks on the y axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the y axis The unit depends on the measurement Retrieving Results Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 277 The unit depends on the application of the command Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If nece
150. Q NTRGTUDSILON us ecoute ease ti epa ve rn terrre ven ter Eder e 324 STATUS QUEStionable DIQ P TRANSOM vse iore rere SA 325 STATUus QUEStionable DIQ EVENI ttti AA N de ER anes 325 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition STATUs QUEStionable SYNO ENABIO t conca ecce ette tanned aie amie STATus QUEStionable de RE STAT s QUEStionable S YNG P TRahsitlon oc rre tert ies rn ener hene eros STATUs QUEStionable S YNO EVENI t rt ttr re reed e pr deb ventu 322 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess seen 219 GvGfemCOMMunicateRDEVice GENerator INTertace nennen 219 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK m SYSTem cOMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYBPE eterni epit toan aaa SYSTem cGoMMunicate RDEVice PMETer GOUNE ceci rette idee er d nic HE 226 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe eene 225 SYSTem COMM icat RDEVice PME Tersp gt DEF NE ene 226 SYSTem COMMu nicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRESS siisii 220 SYSTem PRESet CHANnelEEXECUte EE 184 SC HRH 281 TRACE e e EE 198 Ree E EE 199 Biss vapeur 199 TRACe IQ APCon STATe n TRAGeIQ AVERage GOUNIL or rr rtt rte A e d ER EY KE EX REV XE Y HR ERES RS Ree WE RER KE 286 TRACE IQ BWIDIM urnie mae cate senescent nanan nes an Aone eens 261 TRAGOSIO DATA E E 310 TRACelQ DATA MEMO ci 311 TRACSIODA TA EE 309 TRACe IQ DIQFilter TIRACCAQ N
151. R Ree EE EE 256 TRAC IQ EGAT LEN EE 256 TRACE IQ EGA Te NOF Ee E 256 TRACSIO EGATO TYPE E 256 Ree E TRACe IQ RLENgth n Ree pe Re e NN TRACETO a elle 264 TRAGeIQ WBANd MBWIDT scort A A HO e du ed 265 TRACelQ WBANd ESTA DEE 264 TRACSIOESTA TO lucia A a anna 185 TRAGOS COP TEE 285 TIRAGe lt n gt DATAT MEMOS iacsisnescatta tes mi E A NEE RAEN 314 HEET E RE 315 REENEN 313 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff P TRIGger SEQuence DTIMa comics netter ntn en eer eerie tt cri rte ert ee e EES TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME eit pr e t aaa TRIGger SEQuence 1EPower HOLEDO T uicit orto eer bre nece Vn pec ilte teri Ln ent a TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYS Teresis n ort rper tnn rear rir rni enne 248 TRIGger SEQuence LE EVelLBBBPDOWer rti t tre rtp dde e n RE eee ep TRIGger SEQuence EE eege g ie irt utto E ndo t Dh Ee De rre ta de E DE Eee TRIGger SEQuence LEVel l QPower TRIGger SEQuence LEVEREPOWer iii az TRIGger SEQuence LEVellEXTernal lt port laica ri ii er e khe 249 RK ee Rene RE al 250 TRIGger SEQUENCE SOURCe trt AAA ed e AA 250 TRIGger SEQuence MIMERIN Ter Val cocinar a ita poene oc i sends 252 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt PO E UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer RATio Index Symbols ger 246 A Aborting A O hl aot th ele 141 142 AC DC COUPIING E 78 Activating UO Analy
152. R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument func tions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting 1 3 1 3 1 Conventions Used in the Documentation In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF forma
153. R amp S9FSW 1 Q Analyzer and UO Input Interfaces User Manual Ymax 9 988 mV 1175 6449 02 16 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S9FSW models with firmware version 2 00 and higher e R amp S9 FSWS 1312 8000K08 e R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 e R amp S FSW26 1312 8000K26 e R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 e R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 e R amp S FSW67 1312 8000K67 In addition to the base unit the following options are described e R amp S B10 1313 1622 02 e R amp S B13 1313 0761 02 e R amp S B17 1313 0784 02 e R amp S B21 1313 1100 26 e R amp S B24 1313 0832 13 26 e R amp S B25 1313 0990 02 e R amp S B28 1313 1645 02 e R amp S B40 1313 0861 02 R amp S9 U40 1313 52505 02 e R amp S B80 1313 0878 02 R amp S U80 1313 5211 02 e R amp S B160 1313 1668 02 R amp S U160 1313 3754 02 e R amp S B320 1313 7172 02 R amp S9 U320 1313 7189 02 e R amp S B500 1313 4296 02 e R amp S9 B71 1313 1651 13 26 1313 6547 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2014 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp C
154. RACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 lt OffsSwPoint gt The offset in sweep points related to the start of the measure ment at which data retrieval is to start lt NoOfSwPoints gt Number of sweep points to be retrieved from the trace Example TRAC DATA MEM TRACE1 25 100 Retrieves 100 sweep points from trace 1 starting at sweep point 25 Usage Query only Retrieving Results TRACe lt n gt DATA X lt TraceNumber gt This command queries the horizontal trace data for each sweep point in the specified window for example the frequency in frequency domain or the time in time domain measurements This is especially useful for traces with non equidistant x values e g for SEM or Spuri ous Emissions measurements Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt Trace number TRACE1 TRACE6 Example TRAC3 X TRACE1 Returns the x values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only 10 8 3 Retrieving Marker and Peak Search Results The following commands are required to retrieve the results of markers and peak searches CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Fbteakey senes nnns stain nnns 315 CAL CulateeMARKerF NGIGINFPESakSS EE 315 CAL Gulate sms DELTatmarkeretmot WE 316 GALGulate n MARKer Im Y EE 316 TEE STORG LIST PE 317 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks X This command queries the position of the peaks on the x axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion F
155. RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 119 Amplitude Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 241 INPut EATT AUTO on page 241 INPut EATT on page 240 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well The parameters Input Coupling and Impedance are identical to those in the Input settings see chapter 6 4 1 Input Source Settings on page 77 Preamplifier option B24 Input Settings If option R amp S FSW B24 is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For R amp S FSW 26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available
156. RIGGER The R amp S FSW can only measure a value when the generator signals the end of the setting procedure via the BLANK signal Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator Reverse sweep The frequency offset for automatic coupling can be used to sweep in the reverse direc tion To do so define a negative offset in the external generator measurement configu ration Note that the frequency is defined as the unsigned value of the equation thus a negative frequency is not possible Example Example for reverse sweep FanalyzerStat 100 MHz F analyzerStop 200 MHz Forse 300 MHz Numerator Denominator 1 gt F Generatorstart 200 MHz gt F Generatorstop 100 MHz If the offset is adjusted so that the sweep of the generator crosses the minimum gener ator frequency a message is displayed in the status bar Reverse Sweep via min Ext Generator Frequency 5 4 4 8 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Example Example for reverse sweep via minimum frequency Fanalyzerstart 100 MHz Fanayzerstop 200 MHz Forse 150 MHz F min 20 MHz Numerator Denominator 1 gt F GeneratorStart DU MHz gt GeneratorStop 50 MHz via Fmin Displayed Information and Errors Channel bar If external generator control is active some addi
157. RIGgerRHYS Teresis 2 22 22 2 Decree ii 234 SENSeJPMETersps TRIGgeEEBVEl trio ottenere ca e ient EES 235 SENSE PMETermp Ri Coen SLOP dette ee n E reb c ddr tale dl e ei 235 SENSe PMETer p TRIGgei S TATe 2 caeca eco inen ete cetero ec ai 236 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger DTIMe Time This command defines the time period that the input signal has to stay below the IF power trigger level before the measurement starts Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Time gt Range Os to 1s Increment 100 ns RST 100 us Example PMET2 TRIG DTIMe 0 001 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HOLDoff lt Holdoff gt This command defines the trigger holdoff for external power triggers Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Holdoff gt Time period that has to pass between the trigger event and the start of the measurement in case another trigger event occurs Range Os to 1s Increment 100 ns RST Os Example PMET2 TRIG HOLD 0 1 Sets the holdoff time of the trigger to 100 ms Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 109 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis for external power triggers The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the IF power trigger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Suff
158. RKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe on page 299 Exporting the Peak List The peak list can be exported to an ASCII file DAT for analysis in an external appli cation Remote command MMEMor y STORe PEAK on page 302 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 313 7 3 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar SINS LO ui aa 161 e E oa coi tit a tdi dd 161 Restore Original IISpIay en A cole e EN due 162 Deactivating Zoom Selection mode 162 Single Zoom ER A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 303 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 302 Multiple Zoom ER 7 4 Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 304 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z0O0M MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 303 Restore Original Display Restores the original disp
159. Rce on page 236 For more information and prerequisites see IF 2 GHz OUTPUT on page 62 Return values lt SideBand gt NORMal The normal sideband is output INVerted The inverted sideband is output Usage Query only Manual operation See IF VIDEO DEMOD Output on page 112 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling The following commands are required to configure the amplitude and vertical axis set tings in a remote environment e e E EE 238 e Configuring the Attenuation enne nnne nennen nnns 239 Conhquring A PTSD AA A 241 Scaling TMS YM iii ida t 242 Amplitude Settings Useful commands for amplitude configuration described elsewhere e SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 269 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude configuration CAL Culate nzM Ab ker mz FUNGC HonRtterence eeeeseseeeee eene nnne 238 ee EE Ee 239 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel nana 239 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OF FSet ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeeees 239 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion REFerence This command matches the reference level to the power level of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC REF Sets the reference level to the level of marker 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Reference Level Marker Level on page 159 10
160. SEQuenceLIFPower Ch HR CN 248 TRIGgen SEQuencel LEVE BROWN oir 248 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTernal port cessere 249 TRiGgern SEQuence E 249 TRIGger SEQuence L EVellQPOoWeL 2 c tua contumacia aaa 249 TRIGSger SEQuence LEVE REPOWEF nieder Ra en ke Fonte ERE Eon toe v ene ge PR nea gua 250 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements TRIGger SEQuetice SL e 250 TRIGE SEQuence SOURCE ia A i A 250 TRIGger SEQuence TIMERINTeVal ocio 252 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Period gt This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Ana log Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 248 command for new remote control programs Parameters lt Period gt Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can b
161. SPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Manual operation See Range on page 124 See Y Axis Max on page 124 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again Usage SCPI confirmed DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When the display update during remote control is off this command has no immediate effect Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL Manual operation See Scaling on page 124 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition lt Position gt This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly For measurements with the external generator R amp S FSW B10 the command defines the position of the reference value Parameters lt Position gt O PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corre sponds to the upper display border RST 100 PCT frequency display 50 PCT time dis play Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Posi
162. See Maximum Bandwidth on page 136 TRACe IQ WBANd MBWIDTH Limit Restricts the maximum analysis bandwidth Parameters Limit Manual operation 80 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 80 MHz The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 is deactivated TRACe IQ WBANd STATe is set to OFF 160 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 160 MHz The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B320 is deactivated Not available or required if bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 is installed TRACe IQ WBANd STATe is set to ON 500 MHz 320 MHz MAX All installed bandwidth extension options are activated The cur rently available maximum bandwidth is allowed see chap ter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 24 TRACe IQ WBANd STATe is set to ON RST maximum available Default unit Hz See Maximum Bandwidth on page 136 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements 10 4 6 Adjusting Settings Automatically The commands required to adjust settings automatically in a remote environment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 10 Adjust ing Settings Automatically on page 142 MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode settings related to data acquisition measurement time hys teresis can only be adjusted automatically in the MSRA Master not in the MSRA applications SENSE
163. See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 156 See Search Next Minimum on page 159 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 159 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 156 Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M AimumlEEFT senes nne 298 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT esee nns nnns 298 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK cessisse 298 CAL Culate lt n gt DELTamarkeresm gt MAXimum RIGHt seen nnns 298 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkermz MiNimum LEET 298 CAL Culate lt n gt DELTamarkerem gt MINimum NEXT ooooccccccncnncccconnnonnnnconononononnnnonnnncnannnnnnns 298 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eee 299 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 299 IO Analysis CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage
164. TATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 152 See Marker Type on page 153 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 10 7 2 2 IO Analysis Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 153 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X lt Position gt This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 19 See Marker Peak List on page 19 See Marker Position X value on page 153 General Marker Settings The following commands control general marker functionalit
165. TRACe IO STATe command to change the application of the current channel A measurement is started immediately with the default settings when the channel is activated Activating UO Analyzer Measurements Different remote modes available In remote control two different modes for the I Q Analyzer measurements are availa ble e A quick mode for pure data acquisition This mode is activated by default with the TRACe 10 STATe command The evaluation functions are not available however performance is slightly improved e Amore sophisticated mode for acquisition and analysis This mode is activated when a new channel is opened for the UO Analyzer applica tion INST CRE NEW INST CRE REPL or by an additional command see TRACe IQ EVAL on page 184 Switching the data basis for measurement By default the UO Analyzer captures and processes UO data However the UO Ana lyzer application not Master in MSRA mode can also perform measurements on the captured UO data in the time and frequency domain In order to do so the I Q Analyzer performs an FFT sweep on the captured UO data providing power vs frequency results or uses the RBW filter to obtain power vs time zero span results This data is then used for the common frequency or time domain measurements In order to switch between these measurements you must select the data basis before performing a measurement For a de
166. Tamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt 299 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK sees enne 299 CALCulatesn gt DEL Tamarkersm gt MREF oca tra uir ca cue en iene Noe aaa 288 CALGulate n gt DELTamarkerm gt TRACO unir ct epit ce ete ipe Coe dr tipo Peg eda 289 CALECUlate n gt DELTaMarker E EE 289 GCALGulatesn DEL TamarkerstmiY EE 316 CGALCulate n DELTamarker m S E EE eoo tato ht tret rtr rr er toe reete erts 289 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker m1z LINK OMAR erem 288 CALGulatesi gt MARKer ELTER 292 Te EE ee EE 293 CALCulatesna MARKer lt im gt 2AOF Fis cto cios a iia 290 CAL Culate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer 244 CAlulate cnzMAbker mzFUNGCiontptzke ANNotatonLAPellGTATel 299 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz EUNGCion bake IST GLEN 200 CAL Culate nzMAbkercmzEUNG ontptake GOhRT cn naar cn rennen nnne 301 CALC latesn gt MARKer lt sm gt FUNGCionFbEake STAT 301 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate 0 0 na nanncnnno 200 CAL Culate nzMAbkercmzFEUNGCionRtterence A 238 CAL GCulate n gt MARKerem gt MAXiMUMAUTO iii ad neice 295 CALCulatesnz MARKersm MAXiImumLBF T ictericia 296 CALCulatesn gt MARKersm gt MAXimum NEXT a cric is Ee bx agrees 296 CAL Culate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGLEt ctore ttp ues ciere ias 296 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimumr PEAK esses nennen nennen neret nnne 296 CAL Gulatesns MARKerem MINim rmAU TQ itcr peia AEN
167. Te rte rrt tren rre rens 231 SENSe PMETer lt p gt ROFFset STATe SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger DTIME ocio nc ci thc eh oer toe cio EES SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HOLDoff da SENSe JPMETersp gt TRIGgEr HV S Tere Sui A ELE re ene ue REX cn 234 SENSe PMETersp TRIGGer BEVel i nr err ri da 235 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger SLOBe rtt tr ene i n 235 SENSe PMETersps TRIGgerp STATO icta stone Sete EE e Seed SES gebe REND 236 SENSe PMETersp UPDate S TAT8 rene ia ic rnt rere reta e reete eran 233 SENSe PMETer pP ESTA Teliciciiia tret trt t ee bre ep rne t den rre Ede ee an 232 SENSe PROB schs SETuUp OMOPFfset iati rotae etre E Rd xc aa cU nube naue ud 198 SENSe PROBes pz ID PARTn tmb6r rrr trn e erp tr te epe dead aeaa 213 SENSe PROBe sp ID SRNutrnb6r irit rrt re a T CREER ERI Pe 213 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SET Up MOD eege Eder dendo SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME SENSe PROBe lt p2 SETUp S l ATe rrr t bre etre ned e v E e ee eh n raagis 214 SENSE PROBE p SETUP TYPE Rara Recxiesintnudeas 215 ISENSe RTMS GAP T re OFF Set rine rennes a ene rk Erid Fr rer ce FE FREE SRE 308 SENSe SWAPIQ a cene tnter a rtp e Een e eco redo yv eo ette dtp edv ae ve dp dues 260 SENSE SWE SP COUN neniani eei more detecte exe dti eve ds FA gera Fi Fs dex cene st 280 SENSe SWEep COUN ei ue 281 CALG late IO le TEE 180 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEaks COUN
168. Thus the y axis scale starts at lt Y Axis Max gt and ends at lt Y Axis Max gt The maximum y axis value depends on the current reference level If the reference level is changed the Y Axis Max value is automatically set to the new reference level in V This command is only available if the evaluation mode for the UO Analyzer is set to IQ Vector or Real Imag Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe on page 242 Frequency Settings 6 6 Frequency Settings Frequency settings for the input signal can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey Center Frequenc ize Freque Value COMET ee S O A E E ea 125 Center e E e 125 Frequency OSO iii ibi 126 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 E fcenter s fmax ER SPAN min 2 fmax and span are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 244 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually
169. Trig ger on page 104 Fig 6 2 Power sensor support standard test setup Using the power sensor with several applications The power sensor cannot be used from the R amp S FSW firmware and the R amp S Power Viewer Plus virtual power meter for displaying results of the R amp S NRP power sensors simultaneously Result display The results of the power sensor measurements are displayed in the marker table For each power sensor a row is inserted The sensor index is indicated in the Type col umn R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 d m RBW Att dB SWT 40 8ms VBW Mode Auto Sweep 1 Frequency Sweep 1001 pts Stimulus Response Function Result 72 20 dBm PWR100057 NRP Z11 60 79 dBm PWR100393 NRP Z81 Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger Power sensors can be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level e g from a signal generator Currently only the following power sensors are supported as power triggers e R amp S NRP Z81 e R amp S NRP Z85 e R amp S NRP Z86 With the R amp S FSW the power sensors can be connected to the Power Sensor inter face directly and no further cables are required They can then be configured as an external power sensor trigger Fig 6 3 Connecting a power sensor using the POWER SENSOR interface The R amp S FSW receives an external trigger signal when the defined trigger level is measured b
170. UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing SS SS SS AA lt lt gt 5 eee eS eee 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input Definitions e Input sample rate ISR the sample rate of the useful data provided by the con nected instrument to the R amp S FSW input e User Output Sample rate SR the sample rate that is defined by the user e g in the Data Aquisition dialog box in the I Q Analyzer application and which is used as the basis for analysis or output e Usable I Q Analysis bandwidth the bandwidth range in which the signal remains undistorted in regard to amplitude characteristic and group delay this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW e Record length Number of UO samples to capture during the specified measure ment time calculated as the measurement time multiplied by the sample rate For the UO data acquisition digital decimation filters are used internally The passband of these digital filters determines the maximum usable VO bandwidth In consequence signals within the usable UO bandwidth passband remain unchanged while signals outside the usable UO bandwidth passband are suppressed Usually the suppressed signals are noise artifacts and the second IF side band If frequencies of interest to you are also suppressed you should try to increase the output sample rate since this increases the maximum usable UO bandwidth
171. UO Data and Results eene 317 Querying the Status Registers sees 319 Programming Exampl es cucine eee tient terree marine cetur aene ioiaa a eR erii vua dan 325 Annex FRETS SINC 334 Description of the LVDS Conme tol ccccccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeee eee REENEN 334 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format 335 Reference Format Description for UO Data Files usse 336 VQ Data File Format 1q tar o ori 338 List of Remote Commands UO Analyzer l Q Input Interfaces Er A 344 jj ae E Laana 351 User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 4 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Preface 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual provides all the information specific to the application and processing digital UO data All general instrument functions and set tings common to all applications are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included e Welcome to the I Q Analyzer application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application e Typical Applications for the I Q Analyzer and optional input interfaces Example measurement scenarios for UO data import and analysi
172. VALue essen 221 SENSe CORRection COLLect ere 221 SENSe CORRection ENN iiir oe ctae be da io oe 222 E Ee E TEE 222 SENSe CORRection STATE oooooonococionrcc tirita rai i n 223 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator neret 223 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue lt Value gt The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid For external generator calibration measurements requires External Generator Control option R amp S FSW B10 this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters lt Value gt RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm Manual operation See Reference Value on page 102 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire lt MeasType gt This command initiates a reference measurement calibration The reference mea surement is the basis for the measurement normalization The result depends on whether a reflection measurement or transmission measurement is performed see SENSe CORRection METHod on page 222 To obtain a correct reference measurement a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must have been carried out This is only possible in the single sweep mode This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 218
173. Wer on page 239 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 144 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 269 RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 is not available mechanical attenuation is applied This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S
174. age 192 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 192 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 192 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 192 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed e Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face e Used port Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Inter face e Level and unit that corresponds to an l Q sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 190 DiglConf Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is available in the In Output menu but only if the optional software is installed Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 20 360 86 Build 170 or higher is required To return to the R amp S FSW application press any key on the front panel The R amp S FSW application is displayed with the Input Output menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on th
175. ain the power level of the DUT The noise source is controlled in the Output settings see Noise Source on page 113 Receiving and Providing Trigger Signals Using one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors of the R amp S FSW the R amp S FSW can use a signal from an external reference as a trigger to capture data Alternatively the internal trigger signal used by the R amp S FSW can be output for use by other connected devices Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to syn chronize the transmitted and received signals within a measurement For details on the connectors see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External trigger as input If the trigger signal for the R amp S FSW is provided by an external reference the refer ence signal source must be connected to the R amp S FSW and the trigger source must be defined as External on the R amp S FSW User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 60 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing SSS SSS _ _ _zz lt gt _z gt __z ___ _ 2 5 5 4 8 Trigger output The R amp S FSW can send output to another device either to pass on the internal trigger signal or to indicate that the R amp S FSW itself is ready to trigger The trigger signal can be output by the R amp S FSW automatically or manually by the user If it is sent automatically a high signal is output when the R amp S FSW has tr
176. al signals For complex signal input I jQ always use two identical cables for the and Q con nectors same length same type same manufacturer Otherwise time delay or gain imbalance may occur between the different cables which cannot be calibrated All connectors have a fixed impedance of 50 Q and may receive a maximum input level of 4 Vpp each Risk of instrument damage Do not overload the BASEBAND INPUT connectors An input voltage of 4 V must never be exceeded Noncompliance will destroy the Analog Baseband Interface com ponents The device that provides analog baseband input or the probe must be connected to the R amp S FSW accordingly Since the Digital UO input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path both cannot be used simultaneously When one is activated established connec tions for the other are disconnected When the second input is deactivated connec tions to the first are re established This may cause a short delay in data transfer after switching the input source Input via the Analog Baseband Interface can be enabled in the I Q Analyzer the Ana log Demodulation application or in one of the optional applications that process l Q data where available R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing e a lt gt gt __ _ _ gt __ _ gt 5 3 2 QD Analog Baseband Input The Analog Baseband I
177. alog boxes as indicated in the Overview The Overview varies depending on the application for detailed descriptions see the corresponding application User Manual The Overview for the UO Analyzer Master provides quick access to the following con figuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Input settings See chapter 6 4 Data Input and Output Settings on page 76 2 Amplitude settings See chapter 6 5 Amplitude on page 116 3 Frequency settings See chapter 6 6 Frequency Settings on page 125 4 Optionally Trigger Gate settings See chapter 6 7 Trigger Settings on page 126 5 Bandwidth settings See chapter 6 8 Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings on page 134 6 Optionally output settings See chapter 6 4 3 Output Settings on page 111 7 Analysis settings and functions See chapter 7 Analysis on page 147 Import Export Functions 8 Display configuration See chapter 6 9 Display Configuration on page 142 To configure settings gt Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting For step by step instructions on configuring UO Analyzer measurements see chap ter 8 1 How to Perform Measurements in the I Q Analyzer Application on page 164 Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corne
178. amples to be included in a single window in averaging mode In single mode the window length corresponds to the Record Length on page 137 Values from 3 to 4096 are available in Manual mode in Advanced FFT mode val ues from 3 to 524288 are available However the window length may not be longer than the FFT Length If the window length is shorter than the FFT Length the sample data is filled up with zeros up to the FFT length If the window length is longer than the Record Length that is not enough samples are available a window length the size of the Record Length is used for calculation The window length and the Window Overlap determine how many FFT calculations must be performed for each record in averaging mode see Transformation Algorithm on page 138 5 6 4 Frequency Resolution of FFT Results RBW The resolution bandwidth defines the minimum frequency separation at which the individual components of a spectrum can be distinguished Small values result in a high precision as the distance between two distinguishable frequencies is small Higher values decrease the precision but increase measurement speed The RBW is determined by the following equation Sample Rate Window Length Definition of RBW 5 2 RBW Normalized Bandwidth Note The normalized bandwidth is a fixed value that takes the noise bandwidth of the window function into consideration The maximum RBW is restricted by the Analysis Ba
179. an Values iia ia peer eet Capitalization zs Character data 5 errem eren DatablockS rre nee Numeric values Optional keywords Paratrielers iia n Fere eria ER 177 Strings DUMMIES m 176 Remote control Miei ML E 180 Repetitiominterval comica rrt 131 SOMO ainia ic vanes 131 Resampler Data processing 5 oce htnc 21 Resetting RF INPUT protectior E 44 186 Restoring Channel settings 2 rere 75 Result displays ee uctor IER ccr tree ES 17 MAgnitude sssini ica recital 16 Marker table i rri tica tata 19 Real lmagi O cuite aa n Ye 18 GE i e a 17 Result frequency External generator rrr re 100 Results Analyzing raria n dia Data format remote nee UO Analyzer remote Ss Retrieving remote rins Updating the display remote ssssse 306 Reverse sweep External Generator EE 57 99 RF attenuation Auto SOMKEY iine coro ia Manual SORKey iet t bored t ipic da Analog Baseband connector a Gonnector remote aiei cred meets Oyerload Protection 2 rrr ene Overload protection remote REMOTE ETE RF overrange External Mixer B21 2 tee RF OVLD External generator xiii 58 RF Power MOI tii 130 Trigger level r mote remm 250 Rising Slope Power SEASON src teret ena 109 RUN CONT nci s
180. annel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA MSRT Master channel is selected Example INST SEL Spectrum INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named Spectrum and creates a new measurement channel named Spectrum 2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measure ment channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 182 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 182 Example INST CRE SAN Spectrum 2 Adds an additional spectrum display named Spectrum 2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace Activating UO Analyzer Measurements lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list o
181. anually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not e orange AL the line lies within the interval e white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval 1 Magnitude Analysis Interval 5 CF 994 9 MHz For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual 5 8 Measurements in the Time and Frequency Domain The UO Analyzer application not Master in multistandard mode can also perform measurements on the captured UO data in the time and frequency domain In order to do so the I Q Analyzer performs an FFT sweep on the captured UO data providing power vs frequency results or uses the RBW filter to obtain power vs time zero span results This data is then used for the common frequency or time domain measure ments provided by the R amp S FSW Spectrum application such as ACLR SEM or CCDF User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 70 Measurements in the Time and Frequency Domain Configuration Apart from the data capturing process the measurements are identical in the Spectrum and UO Analyzer applications They are configured using the same settings and pro vide the same results The Magnitude result display in the UO
182. are activated directly after the R amp S FSW has been set to the I Q Analyzer application for the first time or after a Preset Channel on page 75 Table 6 1 Default settings for the UO Analyzer application Parameter Value Application UO Analyzer Master Sequencer mode Continuous Sweep mode Continuous Reference level 0 dBm Center frequency 13 25 GHz Attenuation 10 dB Acquisition time 31 281us Record length 1001 samples Sample rate 32 0 MHz RBW 36 79375 kHz Trigger settings FREE RUN Evaluation Window 1 Spectrum Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus Configuration Overview Ref Level Level Offset Center Freq Offset Freq Offset Frequency Analysis Dig BB Out Sample Rate Trace 1 Detector Trigger Out Moos Time Record Length Fig 6 1 Configuration Overview for I Q Analyzer Master In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the di
183. arten 325 STATus QUEStHonable DIQD EVE EE 325 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Example STAT QUES DIQ COND Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 Usage SCPI confirmed STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to O transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the as
184. asurement bandwidth sample rate cannot be changed The measurement time can only be decreased in order to perform measurements on an extract of the available data only Note Even when the file input is deactivated the input file remains selected and can be activated again quickly by changing the state Remote command INPut SELect on page 188 Select UO Data File Opens a file selection dialog box to select an input file that contains UO data Note that the I Q data must have a specific format iq tar as described in chap ter A 4 I Q Data File Format iq tar on page 338 The default storage location for UO data files is C R_S Instr user Remote command INPut FILE PATH on page 189 External Mixer Settings The external mixer is configured in the External Mixer tab of the Input dialog box which is available when you do one of the following if the R amp S FSW B21 option is installed e Press the INPUT OUTPUT key then select the External Mixer Config softkey Data Input and Output Settings e From the Overview select Input then switch to the External Mixer tab under Input Source Note that external mixers are not supported in MSRA MSRT mode For details on using external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual e Mixer SUN EE 81 BASIC SUIS Em 84 e Managing Conversion Loss Tables ivi i 86 e Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Table 87 Mixer Settings In this tab you configur
185. ate the final spectrum Note in previous versions of the R amp S FSW the I Q Analyzer always used the linear average detector If necessary the trace detector is also used to reduce the number of calculated frequency points defined by the FFT length to the defined num ber of sweep points By default the Autopeak trace detector is used Note Using a detector other than Auto Peak and fewer than 4096 sweep points may lead to wrong level results For details see Combining results trace detector on page 65 Auto Selects the optimum detector for the selected trace and filter mode This is the default setting Type Defines the selected detector type Note If the EMI R amp S FSW K54 measurement option is installed and the filter type CISPR is selected additional detectors are availa ble even if EMI measurement is not active Remote command SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion on page 285 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO on page 285 Hold If activated traces in Min Hold Max Hold and Average mode are not reset after specific parameter changes have been made Normally the measurement is started anew after parameter changes before the mea surement results are analyzed e g using a marker In all cases that require a new measurement after parameter changes the trace is reset automatically to avoid false results e g with span changes For applicat
186. ation See Magnitude on page 16 See Spectrum on page 17 See Q Vector on page 17 See Real Imag 1 Q on page 18 See Marker Table on page 19 See Marker Peak List on page 19 Table 10 3 lt WindowType gt parameter values for IQ Analyzer application Parameter value Window type FREQ Spectrum MAGN Magnitude MTABle Marker table PEAKIist Marker peak list RIMAG Real Imag 1 Q VECT 1 Q Vector LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows from top left to bot tom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syn tax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Configuring the Result Display Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result Unies tt Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Usage Quer
187. ation See Show Line on page 163 CALCulate MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s Manual operation See Position on page 163 IO Analysis CALCulate MSRA WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the index lt n gt This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only INITiate REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA MSRT mode not the MSRA MSRT Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged The application channel must be selected before this command can be executed see INSTrument SELect on page 184 Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits
188. axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks Y This command queries the position of the peaks on the y axis IO Analysis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the y axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only MMEMory STORe PEAK lt FileName gt This command exports the marker peak list to a file The file format is dat Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR PEAK test Saves the current marker peak list in the file test dat Usage Event Manual operation See Exporting the Peak List on page 161 10 7 3 Zooming into the Display 10 7 3 1 Using the Single Zoom REGER Tee e RTE 302 DISPlay eene e E KEE 303 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt
189. ayed in the status bar and a status bit is set in one of the status registers see chapter 10 10 Querying the Status Registers on page 319 For details on the message select it on the status bar Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface Alternatively to capturing analog UO data from the standard RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW analog baseband signals can also be captured via the optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 if installed e Analog Baseband Input 50 Q Connectors optional 37 e Analg Baseband np ert e rette ntt t ete e e e e ve decret dee 39 e OQ Processing Modes ui erre itor e eee eor 40 e Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Analog Baseband signals 42 e Average Power Copnsumpton eee Analog Baseband Input 50 Q Connectors optional The R amp S FSW Analog Baseband Interface option R amp S FSW B71 provides four BASEBAND INPUT BNC connectors on the front panel of the instrument for analog and Q signals Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface BASEBAND IN PUT 50 lt 2 The upper BNC connectors BASEBAND INPUT and BASEBAND INPUT Q are used to input single ended signals the positive signal input for differential signals as well as input from active Rohde amp Schwarz probes R amp S RT ZSxx and differential probes RT ZDxx The lower BNC connectors I and Q are used to input the negative signal for differenti
190. ayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 6 2 Configuration Overview on page 73 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are per formed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a 3 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as well as the MultiView as the measurements are per formed Sequential operation itself is independant of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during I Q Analyzer operation All different information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in t
191. baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that the Reference Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual for details Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on page 239 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespec tive of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Amplitude Define an offset H the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required
192. be turned off BW 0 8 SR BW 0 8 ISR Fig 5 10 Bandwidths depending on sample rate for active digital input 5 2 4 Interface Status Information When a digitial input or output instrument is connected to the R amp S Digital Baseband Interface the Input or Output dialog boxes provide information on the status of the connection see Connected Instrument on page 92 Connected Instrument on page 116 Output Settings Information on page 116 You can query the information in these dialog boxes using remote commands see INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 190 and OUTPut DIO CDEVice on page 194 Status icons The status of the connection to the Digital Baseband Interface is also indicated as icons in the status bar The status icons have the following meaning 5 3 5 3 1 Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface Table 5 6 Status information for digital baseband connections Icon Status Digital input Connection setup in progress Connection established e Connection error e No cable connected although Digital UO input source state ON Digital UO input source state OFF and no cable connected Connection setup in progress Connection established e Connection error e No cable connected although Digital UO output state ON Digital UO output source state OFF and no cable connected Error messages If an error occurs a message is displ
193. ber Changes the IEC IEEE bus address of the external generator Parameters Number Range 0 to 30 RST 28 Example SYST COMM GPIB RDEV GEN ADDR 15 Manual operation See GPIB Address TCP IP Address on page 97 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface lt Type gt Defines the interface used for the connection to the external generator This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 218 Parameters Type GPIB TCPip RST GPIB Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN INT TCP Manual operation See Interface on page 96 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK lt Type gt This command selects the link type of the external generator if the GPIB interface is used The difference between the two GPIB operating modes is the execution speed While during GPIB operation each frequency to be set is transmitted to the generator sepa rately a whole frequency list can be programmed in one go if the TTL interface is also used Frequency switching can then be performed per TTL handshake which results in considerable speed advantages This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 218 Parameters Type GPIB TTL GPIB GPIB connection without TTL synchronization for all generators of other manufacturers and some Rohde amp Schwa
194. bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register is set In this case you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the message box Then measurement is possible again Reactivating the RF input is also possible via the remote command INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet RF Input from the Analog Baseband Connector RF input can not only be taken from the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW If the optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input an RF signal can be input at the BASEBAND INPUT connector and redirected from there to the RF input path A transducer is activated to compensate for the additional path of the redirected signal The signal is then processed as usual in the frequency and time domain as for any other RF input This is useful for example to perform frequency sweep measurements with single ended or differential active probes which can also be connected to the BASEBAND INPUT connector R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing _ gt gt gt __zz _ z gt gt ___m gt 5 4 3 Frequency sweep measurements on probe input You can perform RF measurements measurements in the time or frequency domain by connecting a probe to the BASEBAND INPUT connector and switching the input source to this connector in the R
195. bles digital I Q data output interface eege Performing the measurement INIT IMM Starts data acquisition and transmission to the output connector Output via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 This example demonstrates how to output I Q data to a connected instrument via the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 using the I Q Analyzer in a remote environment The data to output is taken from the measurement described in chap ter 10 11 1 I Q Analysis with Graphical Evaluation on page 326 EE Activating the I Q Analyzer application RST Reset the instrument INST CRE IQ IQANALYZER Creates a new measurement channel named IQANALYZER INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode TRAC IQ SRAT 32MHZ Defines the sample rate Programming Examples TRAC IQ RLEN 1000 Sets the record length number of samples to capture to 1000 samples TRAC IQ BWID Queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter determined by the sample rate FORM DATA REAL 32 Formats the data as 32 byte real values TRAC IQ DATA FORM IQP Lists all I values first then all Q values in the trace results TRAC IQ AVER ON Defines averaging for the I Q trace TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Defines an average over 10 sweeps DISP TRAC1 MODE WRIT DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC3 MODE MINH Changes the trace modes OUTP DIQ ON OUTP DIQ
196. ce 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 150 SENSe AVERage n TYPE Mode This command selects the trace averaging mode Parameters Mode VIDeo The logarithmic power values are averaged LiNear The power values are averaged before they are converted to logarithmic values POWer The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averaging After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit RST ViDeo Example AVER TYPE LIN Switches to linear average calculation Usage SCPI confirmed IO Analysis Manual operation See Average Mode on page 150 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis Parameters lt Detector gt APEak Autopeak NEGative Negative peak POSitive Positive peak QPEak Quasipeak CISPR filter only SAMPle First value detected per trace point RMS RMS value AVERage Average CAVerage CISPR Average CISPR filter only CRMS CISPR RMS CISPR filter only RST APEak 1 Q Analyzer RMS Example DET POS Sets the detector to positive peak Manual operation See Detector on page 149 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO State This command couples and decouples the detector to the trace mode Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DET AUTO OFF The selection of the detector is not coupled to the
197. channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the 1 Q data binary file For multi channels the UO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the UO data file see chapter A 4 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 342 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the UO data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e lt xyz gt a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples e xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyzreal 1ch int16 e xyz complex 16ch int8 UO Data File Format iq tar Element Description UserData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the UO data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to
198. connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values Type String containing one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended Usage Query only External Generator Control External generator control commands are available if the R amp S FSW External Genera tor Control option R amp S FSW B10 is installed For each measurement channel one external generator can be configured To switch between different configurations define multiple measurement channels For more information on external generator control see chapter 5 4 4 Basics on Exter nal Generator Control on page 47 e Measurement Configuration nennen nennen 215 e Intenace ele oio conet A tace tra bt rd 218 e Source Me MEET 221 e Programming Example for External Generator Control 223 Measurement Configuration The following commands are required to activate external generator control and to con figure a calibration measurement with an external tracking generator le KEN e 216 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling S TATe nana nnnnnnnn 216 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator eee 216 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator esses eene 217 SOURce EXTemalFREGQuency OFFPSQeL 2 t tkt rein SC EES 217 SOURCE EX NEE R
199. cquisition via the probe can be performed simply by pressing the microbutton Impedance and attenuation The measured signal from the probe is attenuated internally by the probe s specific attenuation For probe signals that are redirected to the RF path the attenuation is compensated using a transducer see Frequency sweep measurements on probe input on page 45 The reference level is adjusted automatically For analog baseband input the attenuation is compensated without a transducer In this case higher levels are available for the full scale level A fixed impedance of 50 Q is used for all probes to convert voltage values to power levels 5 4 3 1 Common Mode Offset Common mode offset compensation is available for R amp S9RT ZD10 20 30 probes with serial number 2 200 000 It can compensate a common DC voltage applied to both input sockets referenced to the ground socket This is particularly helpful for meas urements on differential signals with high common mode levels for example current measurements using a shunt resistor 5 4 4 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output CM offset setting O V CM offset setting 22 V 30 V GE Signal 25V clipping 43000000 20 V EH o 15V 3 A B uu LIII DE 5V Operating Window 8 V Neg input V Fig 5 14 Common mode CM offset compensation for a differential measurement If the input signals fit into the operating voltage window of the R amp S9RT ZD10 20 30
200. creen configuration TRAC DATA TRACel Setting up Probes Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SENSe PROBe p ID PARTnumber nana nnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nn nnn nens 213 SENSE PROBESPS ID SANDS vii io 213 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETUPpIMODE cionado 213 SENSe PROBE lt p SE e E 214 SENSE PROBesp gt SE TUBIS TA EQ ii a AAA 214 SENSE PROBe lt p gt SETUP TYRE comica ta copine to Fecerunt ce E e LER RR ERR REIR 215 SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt SerialNo gt Serial number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE lt Mode gt Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Micr
201. ct the INPUT OUTPUT key and then the Power Sensor Config softkey Select the tab for the power sensor index you want to configure e g Sensor 1 Press Select to analyze the power sensor data according to the current configura tion when power measurement is activated From the selection list with serial numbers of connected power sensors select the sensor you want to configure To have newly connected power sensors assigned to a tab automatically default select Auto Define the frequency of the signal whose power you want to measure a To define the frequency manually select Frequency Manual and enter a fre quency b To determine the frequency automatically select Frequency Coupling and then either Center to use the center frequency or Marker to use the fre quency defined by marker 1 Select the unit for the power result display Select the measurement time for which the average is calculated or define the number of readings to average To define the number of readings to be taken into account manually select Manual and enter the number in the Number of Read ings field To activate the duty cycle correction select DutyCycle and enter a percentage as the correction value If you selected dB or as units relative display define a reference value a To set the currently measured power as a reference value press the Meas gt Ref button b Alternatively enter a value manually in
202. cupied by a probe the Input Configuration setting for the Analog Baseband input source must be set to Single ended for all probes see Input config uration on page 94 Availability of probe input Analog baseband input from connected probes can only be analyzed in applications that support UO data processing and the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 such as the UO Analyzer the Analog Demodulation application or one of the optional applications Frequency sweep measurements with probes Probes can also be used as an alternative method of providing RF input to the R amp S FSW In this case the probe must be connected to the BASEBAND INPUT con User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 45 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output nector and the input is redirected to the RF input path see chapter 5 4 2 RF Input from the Analog Baseband Connector on page 44 As opposed to common RF input processing a transducer is activated before the common process to compensate for the additional path of the redirected signal Probe signals that are redirected to the RF input path can also be analyzed in the Spectrum application of the R amp S FSW base unit Then you can perform RF measurements measurements in the time or frequency domain on the input from a probe Microbutton action You can define an action to be performed by the R amp S FSW when the probe s microbut ton if available is pressed Currently a single data a
203. currently displayed on the R amp S FSW becomes invalid A message in the status bar indicates this situation The message also indi cates whether the sidebands of the IF spectrum output are in normal or inversed order which depends on the used center frequency Prerequisites Note the following prerequisites for output to the IF 2 GHZ OUT connector e Instrument model R amp S FSW43 50 67 external mixers can be used e Q Analyzer or VSA R amp S FSW K70 application e Zero span mode e Center frequency 2 8 GHz 5 5 Q Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase I and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as UO signals UO signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be ana lyzed in the 1 Q baseband Importing and exporting UO signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving l Q signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving UO signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later For example you can capture UO data using the UO Analyzer application and then per form vector s
204. cuting further commands for that channel Usage SCPI confirmed SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 75 TRACe IQ EVAL State This command turns UO data analysis on and off Before you can use this command you have to turn on the I Q data acquisition using INST CRE NEW IQ Or INST CRE REPL or using the TRACe IQ STATe com mand to replace the current measurement channel while retaining the settings Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example TRAC IQ ON Enables UO data acquisition TRAC IQ EVAL ON Enables the UO data analysis mode TRACe IQ STATe State This command changes the application of the current measurement channel to UO Analyzer activating the simple UO data acquisition mode see Different remote modes available on page 180 Executing this command also has the following effects e The sweep amplitude input and trigger settings from the previous application are retained e All measurements from the previous application e g Spectrum are turned off e Alltraces are set to Blank mode
205. d Table 9 2 I Q data output errors using the Digital Baseband Interface B17 and possible solutions Message Possible solutions Sample rate exceeds limit of connec e Reduce the sample rate ted instrument on Digital UO OUT port Keyword FIFO OVLD The sample rate on the connected instrument is higher than the input sample rate setting on the R amp S FSW e Reduce the sample rate on the connected instrument e Increase the input sample rate setting on the R amp S FSW 10 Introduction Remote Commands to Perform Measure ments with IO Data The following commands are specific to performing measurements in the UO Analyzer application or using the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 in a remote environment The R amp S FSW must already be set up for remote operation in a network as described in the base unit manual d 10 1 Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes e Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation e Using the common status registers The following tasks specific to the UO Analyzer application are described here LM A PP ENEE KEREN 174 e COMMON SUIS uti A dade den denne ents AI ARA c 179 e Activati
206. d data to the start of the analysis interval for the I Q Analyzer Useful commands related to MSRT mode described elsewhere e INITiate REFResh on page 306 e INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 280 Remote commands exclusive to MSRT applications The following commands are only available for MSRT application channels GAEGCulate RTMS ALEINe ISBON uada miii diia id cidad 307 CALGulate RTMS ALINE E D D 307 CALGulate RTMS WINDOwWSOS VAL oct in 308 SENSeJRTMS GAPTure OFF Sel ihanaa r E EE E E aAa 308 CALCulate RTMS ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRT applications and the MSRT Master Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Manual operation See Show Line on page 163 CALCulate RTMS ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRT applications and the MSRT Master Retrieving Results Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time pretrigger posttrigger of the MSRT measurement Default unit s Manual operation See Position on page 163 CALCulate RTMS WINDow lt n
207. d 141 RUN SINGLE KOY 141 142 S Sample rate Analog Baseband Interface ssssssssss 39 Definition Digital UO Digital UO remote AA 193 Digital I O data aaron orion 33 Digital output PE O 1 Q Analyzer 1 Q data a E oy EE Relationship to bandwidth eeesessess 25 REMOTE m Em 263 Scalar reflection measurement Externaligeherator societies 49 Scaling Configuration softkey ssssssee 123 NEANIS Sce tere geed E 124 Y axis remote control ssseeeene 243 Search limits Activating RE 157 a EE 158 Search settings SA 158 Searching Configuration softkey sssssssee 156 Select Marker O Sequence c Aborting remote sese Activating remote 7 Mode remote 1 REMOTE een HS Setup files External generator escueta tes Short circuit reflection measurement Calibration external generator 101 Signal capturing Duration remote A 281 Signal ID External Mixer B21 remote control 201 External Mixer B21 esee 85 Signal processing Tele zo TEE 22 Signal source A 188 Single sweep SOT C Y 141 SIMGIO ZOOM E 161 Slope Power sensor trigger rennen nennen 109 Trigger Trigger Power sensor ss 109 iem e ence errr eee ee ere ee 3
208. d or differential signal is being input Note that both differential and single ended active probes are supported How ever since a probe only uses a single connector either BASEBAND INPUT or Q the input configuration must be set to single ended The type of probe is indicated in the Probes subtab of the Input dialog box d If necessary for example due to a mixed up connection or inverse data from the connected device swap the and Q values for correct analysis e If only one component of the input signal is of interest UO mode I only Low IF I or Q only Low IF Q define how to interpret the signal as modulated or real data For modulated data change the Center Frequency to use for down conversion Select a value between 10 Hz and 40 MHz or 80 MHz with option R amp S FSW B71E 4 Press the AMPT key and select Amplitude Config 5 Define the reference level for the input If a probe is connected consider the pro be s attenuation when defining the reference level 6 Select the maximum power level you expect to input at the BASEBAND INPUT connector as the Full scale level or select Auto mode to have it set automati cally according to the selected reference level 7 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example a Baseband Power trigger to start capturing data only when a specific input power is exceeded 8 Press the MEAS CONFIG key and select Data Acquisi
209. d pro cessing large amounts of UO data the R amp S FSW provides an internal calculation of the average power consumption for remote operation according to the following equation 1 NofSamples 1 de SENO P n NofSamples 4 P n A V n I n B V n V n with e V n data of the instrument e n Q data of the instrument User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 43 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output e A conversion factor A e B conversion factor B Remote commands TRACe IQ APCon STATe on page 198 TRACe IQ APCon A on page 198 TRACe IQ APCon B on page 199 TRACe IQ APCon RESult on page 199 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals RF Input Protection The RF input connector of the R amp S FSW must be protected against signal levels that exceed the ranges specified in the data sheet Therefore the R amp S FSW is equipped with an overload protection mechanism This mechanism becomes active as soon as the power at the input mixer exceeds the specified limit It ensures that the connection between RF input and input mixer is cut off When the overload protection is activated an error message is displayed in the status bar INPUT OVLD and a message box informs you that the RF Input was discon nected Furthermore a status bit
210. data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For UO data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See Exporting the Peak List on page 161 TRACe lt n gt DATA lt ResultT ype gt This command queries current trace data and measurement results The data format depends on FORMat DATA Query parameters lt ResultType gt Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE1 TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace Retrieving Results Return values lt TraceData gt Returns the sweep point values as shown in the result display If you are measuring with the auto peak detector the command returns positive peak values only For the Magnitude and Spectrum result displays in the UO Ana lyze
211. defined a reference level offset is also considered For compatibility reasons this command is also available for the baseband power trigger source when using the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IQP 30DBM Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls do
212. e Meas gt Ref setting or the Reference Value setting Remote command UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer on page 233 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer RATio on page 233 Meas Time Average Selects the measurement time or switches to manual averaging mode In general results are more precise with longer measurement times The following settings are recommended for different signal types to obtain stable and precise results Short Stationary signals with high power gt 40dBm because they require only a short measurement time and short measurement time provides the highest repetition rates Normal Signals with lower power or modulated signals Long Signals at the lower end of the measurement range lt 50 dBm or Signals with lower power to minimize the influence of noise Manual Manual averaging mode The average count is set with the Average Count Number of Readings setting Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe on page 231 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe on page 231 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas gt Ref Sets the currently measured power as a reference value for the relative display The reference value can also be set manually via the Reference Value setting Remote command CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE on page 228 Data Input and Output Settings Reference Value Defines the reference value for relative measure
213. e 1 Max Hold Max Avg Min Trace 2 Average Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Msc Cate Min Trace 2 Clear Write Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 284 7 2 0 d QD 7 2 1 7 2 1 1 Marker Usage Marker Usage The following marker settings and functions are available in the I Q Analyzer applica tion For UO Vector displays markers are not available In the UO Analyzer application the resolution with which the frequency can be mea sured with a marker is always the filter bandwidth which is derived from the defined sample rate see chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 24 As of firmware version 1 60 marker settings are window specific since several dia grams can be displayed at the same time now e Marker cn ac 151 e Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions sssssssssss 155 e Marker Peak List Confouratton cnn nnrncnnnncnnens 159 Marker Settings Marker settings can be configured via the MARKER key or in the Marker dialog box To display the Marker dialog box do one of the following e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey e Inthe Overview select Analysis and
214. e ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to O transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range O to 65535 Querying the Status Registers lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65
215. e Level 54 e Coupling the Frequencies nens 55 e Displayed Infortriation and EMOS citan 58 External Generator Connections The external generator is controlled either via a LAN connection or via the EXT GEN CONTROL GPIB interface of the R amp S FSW supplied with the R amp S FSW B10 option For more information on configuring interfaces see the Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols section in the R amp S FSW User Manual TTL synchronization In addition TTL synchronization can be used with some Rohde amp Schwarz generators connected via GPIB The TTL interface is included in the AUX CONTROL connector of the R amp S FSW B10 option Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator For details see chapter 5 4 4 7 Coupling the Frequencies on page 55 In figure 5 15 the TTL connection is illustrated using an SMU generator for example Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output BNC Blank BNC Trigger SMU Fig 5 15 TTL connection for an SMU generator The external generator can be used to calibrate the data source by performing either transmission or reflection measurements Transmission Measurement This measurement yields the transmission characteristics of a two port network The external generator is used as a signal source It is connected to the
216. e Measurement time Rec Length Defined record length number of samples to capture T User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 11 Understanding the Display Information SRate Defined sample rate for data acquisition RBW Spectrum evaluation only Resolution bandwidth calculated from the sample rate and record length Inp Dig IQ Input source digital UO data from the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Inp Analog lt l Q mode Input source analog baseband data from the optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 lt l Q mode defines the processing mode see chapter 5 3 3 I Q Pro cessing Modes on page 40 In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer or trigger settings This information is dis played only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 3 Magnitude IAP Clrw Fig 2 2 Window title bar information in the I Q Analyzer application 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 5 Detector 6 Trace mode Diagram footer information The information in the diagram footer beneath the diagram depends on the evalua
217. e Meed ebe RE 258 SENSe lQ BANDwidth BWIDth RESOIUtion 0 02 cecee ce eee cece cece cece eee eeee eee ee eee ee aa eeea eee eeee 258 SENSE Q a E nl DEET 259 GET TE 259 SENSE IO FF T WINDOWM D E DEE 259 SENSE IG FF TWINDOW OVER aP TEE 260 SENSe IO FFTWINDOWITYPE coo in 260 SENS SWAPid coccion 260 TRACHIQ le EEN 261 TRAC wap ella ii A AAA ao 261 PRAGGAQISBENGU neu tnde coated ey Reeve assa aree OE ecn e ua eoe RE ERes Me EE ER dA 262 HE EE 262 TRACED GRATO ii A A A A A A Ema au de uod 263 TRACI TP Sample c e 264 RE Ge EEN E 264 RE ee RER Mt DE 265 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth MODE Mode This command defines how the resolution bandwidth is determined Parameters Mode AUTO MANual FFT AUTO Default The RBW is determined automatically depending on the sample rate and record length MANual The user defined RBW is used and the FFT window length and possibly the sample rate are adapted accordingly The RBW is defined using the SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution command FFT The RBW is determined by the FFT parameters RST AUTO Example IQ BAND MODE MAN Switches to manual RBW mode IQ BAND RES 120000 Sets the RBW to 120 kHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See RBW on page 137 SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth This command defines the resolution bandwidth manually if SENSe 10 BANDwidth BWIDth M
218. e R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Inter face Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual 6 4 1 5 Data Input and Output Settings Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is minimized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSW once again Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the Analog Base band Interface R amp S FSW B71 in the applications that support it Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Probes ado EA Frequency Input Settings External P Mixer 1 Q Mode 1 jQ Input Config Differential Digital IQ swap 1 0 C o Analo 9 Signal Path Baseband Analog I jQ Center Frequency For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Analog Baseband Input State ica 93 VO MOJE oia id 93 jueltid esie 94 e mail M 94 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the Analog
219. e configured in this case Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range Osto10 0s RST Os Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 131 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Offset gt Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep data cap turing Parameters lt Offset gt For measurements in the frequency domain the range is O s to 30 s For measurements in the time domain the range is the negative sweep time to 30 s RST Os Example TRIG HOLD 500us Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 132 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and UO data measurements Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 132 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis
220. e detector If the record length permits multiple overlapping windows are calculated and combined to create the final spectrum using the selected trace detector Note in previous ver sions of the R amp S FSW the l Q Analyzer always used the linear average detector If necessary the trace detector is also used to reduce the number of calculated fre quency points defined by the FFT length to the defined number of sweep points By default the Autopeak trace detector is used User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 65 Basics on FFT Due to the fact that the frequency points are reduced to the number of sweep points using a detector other than Auto Peak and fewer than 4096 sweep points may lead to wrong level results 4096 samples n use trace detector to combine these FFTs use trace detector to reduce to sweep points 5 6 3 Dependencies Between FFT Parameters FFT analysis in the R amp S FSW is highly configurable Several parameters including the resolution bandwidth record length and FFT length can be defined according to the user s requirements Note however that several parameters are correlated and not all can be configured independently of the others Record Length Defines the number of UO samples to capture By default the number of sweep points is used The record length is calculated as the measurement time multiplied by the sample rate If you change the record length the Meas Time is automatically chang
221. e l Q data is modulated on a carrier frequency and input via the RF INPUT connector on the R amp S FSW 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the I Q Analyzer application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for an UO Analyzer mea surement 3 Select the Input button to select and configure the RF Input signal source 4 Select the Amplitude button to define the attenuation reference level or other set tings that affect the input signal s amplitude and scaling 5 Select the Frequency button to define the input signal s center frequency 6 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an IQ Power trigger to start capturing data only when a specific power is exceeded 7 Select the Bandwidth button and define the bandwidth parameters for data acqui sition How to Perform Measurements in the UO Analyzer Application e Sample rate or Analysis Bandwidth the span of the input signal to be cap tured for analysis or the rate at which samples are captured both values are correlated e Optionally if R amp S FSW B160 B320 is installed the Maximum Bandwidth depending on whether you require a larger bandwidth or fewer spurious emis sions e Measurement Time how long the data is to be captured e Record Length the number of samples to be captured also defined by sam ple rate and measurement time 8 Select the Display Conf
222. e left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 LAY out WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix lt n gt determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 270 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Configuring the Result Display Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify
223. e of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This set ting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer on page 209 Mixer S N Specifies the serial number of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber on page 210 Data Input and Output Settings Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer for which the table is to be applied is a two port or three port type This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs on page 209 Position Value Each position value pair defines the correction value for conversion loss for a specific frequency The reference values must be entered in order of increasing frequencies A maximum of 50 reference values can be entered To enter a new value pair select the Position Value table or select the Insert Value button Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are obtained by inter polation Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values If it con tains more than two reference values spline interpolation is carried out Outside the frequency range covered by the table the conve
224. e sideband Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal then the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Parameters lt State gt ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q RST OFF Manual operation See Swap Q on page 137 TRACe IQ BWIDth This command defines or queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter The bandwidth of the resampling filter depends on the sample rate Parameters Bandwidth For details on the maximum bandwidth see chapter 5 1 1 Sam ple Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 24 Manual operation See Analysis Bandwidth on page 135 TRACe IQ DIQFilter State This command is only available when using the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 By default a decimation filter is used during data acquisition to reduce the sample rate to the value defined using TRACe I0 SRATe If the filter is bypassed the sample rate is identical to the input sample rate configured for the Digital UO input source see 1NPut DIO SRATe on page 193 Parameters State ON OFF ON The digital UO filter bypass is on i e no filter or resampler is used during UO data acquisition OFF The filter bypass is off i e decimation filter and resampler are used during UO data acquisition RST OFF Manual ope
225. e the band and specific mixer settings Lef Afen Radio A Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Band Settings Mixer Type RF Start Digital 1Q RF Stop Handover Freq Lal RF Overrange Preset Band Harm ype Range Harmonic Order Conversion Loss CH Mixer Set PRP COMINGS EE 82 Frosa BaNG aa E 82 Mixer Ke EE 83 Mixer Settings Harmonics Confouratton 83 Ecker NN DE 83 uo op AE UP tact seat R 83 L ALE 83 L EA ci dis 83 Data Input and Output Settings External Mixer State Activates or deactivates the external mixer for input If activated ExtMix is indicated in the channel bar of the application together with the used band see Band on page 82 Remote command SENSe MIXer STATe on page 200 RF Start RF Stop Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band read only The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configura tion see Range 1 2 on page 83 For details on available frequency ranges see table 10 2 Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt on page 202 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP on page 202 Handover Freq Defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range Remote command SENSe MIX
226. eamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 144 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 269 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 267 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 267 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 266 Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In ord
227. easurements on an extract of the available data from the beginning of the file only When using input from an UO data file the RUN SINGLE function starts a single Pulse measurement i e analysis of the stored UO data while the RUN CONT function repeatedly analyzes the same data from the file Sample iq tar files If you have the optional R amp S FSW VSA application R amp S FSW K70 some sample iq tar files are provided in the C R S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Furthermore you can create your own iq tar files in the I Q Analyzer see chap ter 8 3 How to Export and Import UO Data on page 170 Input from Noise Sources The R amp S FSW provides a connector NOISE SOURCE CONTROL with a voltage sup ply for an external noise source By switching the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off in the firmware you can activate or deactive the device as required External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of an amplifier In this case you can first connect an external noise source whose noise power level is known in advance to the R amp S FSW and measure the total noise power From this value you can determine the noise power of the R amp S FSW Then when you measure the power level of the actual DUT you can deduct the known noise level from the total power to obt
228. ed as well For FFTs performed using only a single window Single mode the record length which is then identical to the FFT length may not exceed 512k FFT Length Defines the number of frequency points determined by each FFT calculation The more points are used the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes but the longer the calculation takes In Auto or Manual mode an FFT length of 4096 is used In advanced FFT mode the FFT length can be defined by the user If you use the arrow keys or the rotary knob to change the FFT length the value is incremented or decremented by powers of 2 If you enter the value manually any integer value from 3 to 524288 is available R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing _ z HHHHHA lt A lt A lt AAA lt A gt gt gt gt gt gt ops AAA A lt 222 22 eee eee If the FFT length is longer than the Window Length the sample data is filled up with zeros up to the FFT length The FFT is then performed using interpolated frequency points For an FFT length that is not a power of 2 a DFT discrete Fourier transform is per formed which requires more time for calculation but avoids the effects of interpolation In order to display all calculated frequency points defined by the FFT length the num ber of sweep points is set to the FFT length automatically in advanced FFT mode Window Length Defines the number of s
229. ee tera coe ECKER 296 CALECulatesnz MARKer m MINimutmtcEEF T 2 2 is CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT CAL Culate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUMIRIGH ts cisco etta ertt iaa 297 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK inin iaiia nrenren nnns 297 CALGulatesrs MARKer m TRA CO ocioteca dE EE ear rere 290 CALGUlate lt n gt MARKETEMA Xirsi niea A a aaiae N aaa EASES 291 CALC latesn gt MARKETS M gt N 9 aci pite oclo ie tm ge dedic EEEE EN 316 een Oe E RE KEE 290 CAL Culate lt n gt MARKer lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt M2 gt aai daa cnn nana nn nennt sena 290 CALculate n gt PMETer lt p gt RELatiVe STA TO iii ie As 228 CAL Culate nzPMETercpz REI attvel MAChNtudel AA 228 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE enne 228 CAL Culate lt n gt UNIT POWer STE le Tue ee ee aaa 197 CAL ibration AlO DCOFISCHO EE 197 CALibration PMETer lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE outra dial 227 DIAGnostic SERVICO NSQUICO EE 236 BISPIay FORMABLU itr rrr RA AA A AAA zig MET DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE DISPlayEWINDow lt n TRAGE Y Te Te D 243 DISPlay WINDowsn TRACe Y SCAL utei Es 242 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONE AA 243 DISPlayEWINDowe n TRACe Y SCALe MODE pte ctt eap tar encre ma pena betta EEN 243 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel eessessesessseseeseseee nennen nennen stent nennen 2
230. eflection type calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the refer ence trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements The order of the two cali bration measurements is irrelevant Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 222 Selects the reflection method SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 221 Starts the sweep for open circuit calibration Source Calibration Normalize Switches the normalization of measurement results on or off This function is only available if the memory contains a reference trace that is after a calibration has been performed For details on normalization see chapter 5 4 4 5 Normalization on page 53 Remote command SENSe CORRection STATe on page 223 Recall Restores the settings that were used during source calibration This can be useful if instrument settings were changed after calibration e g center frequency frequency deviation reference level etc Remote command SENSe CORRection RECall on page 222 Data Input and Output Settings Save As Trd Factor Uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix trd under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency The generated trans ducer factor can be further adapted using the Transducer
231. elta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 297 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 298 Center Frequency Marker Frequency Sets the center frequency to the selected marker or delta marker frequency A peak can thus be set as center frequency for example to analyze it in detail with a smaller span This function is not available for zero span measurements Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer on page 244 Reference Level Marker Level Sets the reference level to the selected marker level Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion REFerence on page 238 7 2 3 Marker Peak List Configuration To display the Marker Peak List dialog do one of the following e Press the MKR FUNC key then select the Marker Peak List softkey Marker Usage e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Peak List tab State Settings searchLimits Sort Mode FEES Left Limit E 0 0 Hz a Right Limit m 26 5 GHz Maximum Number of Peaks 50 gt Threshold E 120 0 dBm oT Use Zoom Limits Peak Excursion A Display Marker Numbers Search Limits Off Export Peak List Slate auna ida 160 Son MOJE lt a 160 Maximum Number of EE 160 EIERE 160 Displaying Marker NUMDETS iu ti 161 EXpo
232. emains undistorted in regard to ampli tude characteristic and group delay and can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW The sample rate and the analysis bandwidth are interdependant and are adapted according to the following formula in the UO Analyzer see also chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 24 Analysis bandwidth 0 8 sample rate For or Q only Analysis bandwidth 0 4 sample rate Bandwidth extension options The standard R amp S FSW equipped with the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 can analyze a maximum bandwidth of 40 MHz input per connector i e an 80 MHz analysis bandwidth for a complex baseband signal The bandwidth extension options B28 B40 B80 B160 for RF input have no effect on analog baseband input R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing parcam aec em oe e e ne p epos om pam _ _ 22AA H He i 5 3 5 However a special bandwidth extension option for the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71E is available which allows the R amp S FSW to analyze a maximum bandwidth of 80 MHz input per connector i e a 160 MHz analysis bandwidth Spectrum limits The analog baseband spectrum to be analyzed depends both on the analysis band width and on the center frequency which defines the middle of the spectrum The spectrum should always remain within the span 40
233. ement results can still be normalized approximately using the stored reference trace This is indicated by the APX label in the channel bar instead of NOR This is the case if one or more of the following values deviate from the calibration set tings e coupling RBW VBW SWT e reference level RF attenuation e Start or stop frequency e output level of external generator e detector max peak min peak sample etc e frequency deviation at a maximum of 1001 points within the set sweep limits corre sponds to a doubling of the span Differences in level settings between the reference trace and the current instrument settings are taken into account automatically If the span is reduced a linear interpola tion of the intermediate values is applied If the span increases the values at the left or right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the current start or stop fre quency i e the reference dataset is extended by constant values Thus the instrument settings can be changed in a wide area without giving up normali zation This reduces the necessity to carry out a new normalization to a minimum User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 53 5 4 4 6 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output If approximation becomes too poor however normalization is aborted and an error message is displayed see chapter 5 4 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 58 The normalized trace in the display The
234. ements RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON a Configuring a new conversion loss table Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example extended V band SENS CORR CVL SEL UserTable SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO RR CVL COMM User defined conversion loss table for USER band R R SENS COR R R R CVL BAND USER CVL HARM 6 CVL BIAS 1mA CVL MIX FS Z260 CVL SNUM 123 4567 R CVL PORT 3 SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO V N V A A X Conversion loss is linear from 55 GHz to 75 GHz SENS CORR CVL DATA 55GHZ 20DB 75GHZ 30DB a a a Configuring the mixer and band settings Use user defined band and assign new cvl table SENS MIX HARM BAND USER Define band by two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 cvl table UserTable range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS TABL LOW UserTable SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data default s
235. emote command INPut CONNector on page 186 6 4 1 2 Settings for Input from UO Data Files Settings for input from UO data files is configured in the Input Source gt IQ file tab of the Input Frontend dialog box which is available when you do of the following Currently this input source is only available in the R amp S FSW Pulse application and not in MSRA MSRT operating mode 6 4 1 3 pout Frontend Fi Signal Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output Radio on Frequency Input File TQ File C FSW FSW_1 60d_06_Debug user vsa DemoSignals GSM_16QAM iq tar Select Fle Saved by FSV K70 Comment GSM 16QAM EDGE 5000 symbols CaptureOv 4 Date amp time 2011 09 05T 13 22 48 Sample rate 1 08333 MHz Number of samples 20289 Duration of signal 18 7284 ms Number of channels 1 e Press the INPUT OUTPUT key then select the Input Source Config softkey e Press the MEAS CONFIG key then select the Input Frontend softkey e From the Overview select Input Frontend For details see chapter 5 4 5 Basics on Input from UO Data Files on page 59 Q Input GIE 80 Select VQ Data File roten rre er i beg nee b tae AR Pr ERE Ee ERE ERR eel 80 IQ Input File State Activates input from the selected UO input file If enabled the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer application performs measurements on the data from this file Thus most measurement settings related to data acquisition attenuation center frequency me
236. ence Pin Signal S CLK Level Description for future use 5VD Supply voltage for future use SDAT3_P Serial data channel 3 positive pin carries the bits RE_14 RE_15 RE_16 RE_17 RE_18 RE_19 SDAT4_P Serial data channel 4 positive pin carries the bits TRIGGER_1 GPO TRIGGER 2 GP1 MARKER_2 GP5 Reserve 2 GP3 IM 0 IM 1 SDAT5 P Serial data channel 5 positive pin carries the bits IM 2 IM 3 IM 4 IM 5 IM 6 IM 7 SDAT6 P Serial data channel 6 positive pin carries the bits IM 8 IM 9 IM 10 IM 11 I1M 12 IM 13 SDAT7 P Serial data channel 7 positive pin carries the bits IM 14 IM 15 1M 16 IM 17 IM 18 IM 19 SDATO M reserved for future use Serial data channel 0 negative pin SDAT4 M Serial data channel 1 negative pin SDAT2 M Serial data channel 2 negative pin CLK1 M Clock 1 negative pin DGND Power ground ground return for 5V supply voltage for future use S DATA for future use SDAT3 M Serial data channel 3 negative pin SDAT4_M Serial data channel 4 negative pin SDAT5_M Serial data channel 5 negative pin SDAT6_M Serial data channel 6 negative pin SDAT7_M Serial data channel 7 negative pin GND LVDS ground shielding of transmission lines and shielding of cable Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format When trace data is retrieved usin
237. ency of the analyzer with an offset of 100 kHz analyzer start 10 Hz analyzer stop 1 MHz analyzer span 999 99 KHz generator frequency start 100 005 KHz generator frequency stop 600 KHz generator span 499 995 KHz SOUR EXT FREQ FACT NUM 1 10 4 1 8 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SOUR EXT FREQ FACT DEN 2 SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 100KHZ Perform a transmission measurement with direct connection between the generator and the analyzer and wait till the end SENS CORR METH TRAN SENS CORR COLL ACQ THR WAI Retrieve the measured frequencies 10 Hz 600 kHz TRAC DATA X TRACE1 Retrieve the measured power levels 0 between 10 Hz and 100 kHz below generator minimum frequency nominal 5dBm as of 100 kHz TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the normalized power levels power offsets from calibration results Should be 0 for all sweep points directly after calibration SENS CORR STAT ON TRAC DATA TRACE1 D eege Changing the display of the calibration results Shift the reference line so the 5 dB level is displayed in the center DISP TRAC Y SCAL RVAL 5DB DISP TRAC Y SCAL RPOS 50PCT Working with Power Sensors The following commands describe how to work with power sensors e Configuring Power Gensors eee 225 e Configuring Power Sensor Measurements ccccccccessssseeeesssseeceessssaeeseeseaaeess 227 e Triggering with Power SefiSOfS i reip rede Rare iere Che
238. ent mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 210 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt Band gt K A KA Q U VJE W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Note The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA the input parameter A is still available and refers to the same band as KA For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 10 2 RST F 90 GHz 140 GHz Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BAND KA Sets the band to KA 26 5 GHz 40 GHz Manual operation See Band on page 89 SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 210 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt BiasSetting gt numeric value RST 0 0A Default unit A Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BIAS 3A Manual operation See Write to lt CVL table name gt on page 86 See Bias on page 89
239. er FREQuency HANDover on page 202 Band Defines the waveguide band or user defined band to be used by the mixer The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the RF Start and RF Stop fields For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 10 2 The mixer settings for the user defined band can be selected freely The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 2 on page 83 Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue on page 203 RF Overrange If enabled the frequency range is not restricted by the band limits RF Start and RF Stop In this case the full LO range of the selected harmonics is used Remote command SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe on page 206 Preset Band Restores the presettings for the selected band Data Input and Output Settings Note changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function This function allows you to restore the original band settings Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet on page 202 Mixer Type The R amp S FSW option B21 supports the following external mixer types 2 Port LO and IF data use the same port 3 Port LO and IF data use separate ports Remote command SENSe MIXer PORTs on page 206 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration The harmonics configuration determines t
240. er PORTs lt PortType gt This command specifies whether the mixer is a 2 port or 3 port type Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 83 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe State If enabled the band limits are extended beyond RF Start and RF Stop due to the capabilities of the used harmonics Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See RF Overrange on page 82 Conversion Loss Table Settings The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables SENSeT CORRection C VE BAND iiereeee cuis ipunnee tttm te ite er nd PE ka Etpe ken ee cipe SEN 206 SENSE CORRECCION e EE 207 SENSe CORRection CVLICATAIOG ccoo a 207 SENSE ee Beer 207 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent esses ener nnne nennen h nnne nns 208 SENS ICORRECHIONnICVLIDA KEE 208 SENSe CORRection CVLIHARMOMNIG e 2 1 ticeardan eed taco o SNE Ced evan 209 SENSeCORRection CVL MIXer e receu cuir tmpnatu ihe ne donar tarada 209 ISENSeTCORRSclON CUE PORTS ct ente trea hg eec ida gx voee gd 209 SENSe CORR amp ction CVE SELeol iore cuneo eere id ENEE 210 SENSe CORRection CVE SNUMMBer inr e norte ape p rtu Kran tui anidar NANO ARRE 210 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND Type This command defines the waveguide band for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the curr
241. er lt m gt Y on page 316 Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 19 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Measurement and Result Displays 2 Marker Peak List No l Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PEAK see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 270 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 291 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 316 User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 20 Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input 5 Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Pro 5 1 cessing Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used when describing UO data acquisition on the R amp S FSW in general and in the UO Analyzer application in par ticular is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set tings The UO Analyzer provides various possibilities to acquire the I Q data to be analyzed e Capturing analog UO data from the RF INPUT connector e Capturing digital UO data from the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 e Capturing analog UO data from the optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 for example from ac
242. er to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 268 6 11 Configuring an UO Analyzer as an MSRA MSRT Application Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 267 Configuring an UO Analyzer as an MSRA MSRT Appli cation In principle the UO Analyzer in MSRA MSRT mode is configured as in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode However the I Q Analyzer application not Master in MSRA MSRT mode can also perform measurements on the captured UO data in the time and frequency domain see also chapter 5 7 UO Analyzer in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode
243. er to wait actively for the response data e Setting up the instrument starting the measurement via INIT and querying the result list at the end of the measurement see TRACe 10 DATA MEMory on page 311 With this method the control computer can be used for other activities during the measurement However the additional time needed for synchronization via service request must be taken into account MSRA MSRT operating mode Note that in MSRA MSRT operating mode capturing data is only possible for the MSRA Master channel In UO Analyzer application channels the sweep configuration commands define the analysis interval Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before using these commands DR aaa 276 NiTiate et 277 NUT ate CON TIBUS 2 titre eae bett AAA 277 li gi Blue EE 278 INiTiate GEOuencer ABOL 278 INI Tiate S e Te ET 279 NiMate SEQUENCE MODE olaaa A Ai 279 ETIKETT EE 280 SENSe SWEep COUNL ecce tetteenttentnttenetetet tet totes t test Den 280 SENSE SWEep COUNECURREONE si a td 281 E Lee Ch 281 SENSe SWEep TIME coccion 281 Eh GHEET e AAA A A A ad 281 ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAT command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual
244. er via the connector of the digital base band interface R amp S FSW B17 option There is no need to equalize any IF filter or mix the signal into the complex baseband The digital hardware just has to ensure that the final UO data stored in the record buffer has the correct sample rate The digital input signal is brought to the desired sample rate using a downsampling fil ter and fractional resampling The word length of the data is 18 bits fixed point for each and Q The resulting data can be processed by the selected application see chap ter 3 Typical Applications for the I Q Analyzer and UO Input on page 13 As illustra ted in figure 5 8 the usable sample rate for analysis is dependant on the input sample rate Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Data acquisition hardware Input Sample Sample Rate ISR 18 Rate SR Trigger Fig 5 8 Signal path using digital input Full scale level The Full Scale Level defines the level that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 and can be defined in various units When converting the measured power into dBm an impedance of 50 O is assumed Triggering The following trigger sources are supported e External see External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 128 e BB Power see Baseband Power on page 129 e Time see Time on page 131 e Digital UO general purpose trigger see Digital l Q on page 130 If external triggeri
245. erator with reference to the ana lyzer frequency Select the offset such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer Source Freq RF Numerator Offset Denominator Parameters lt Offset gt lt numeric value gt specified in Hz kHz MHz or GHz rounded to the nearest Hz RST 0 Hz Example SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 10HZ Sets an offset of the generator output frequency compared to the analyzer frequency of 10 Hz Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 99 SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVel lt Level gt This command sets the output power of the selected generator Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt RST 20 dBm Example SOUR EXT POW 30dBm Sets the generator level to 30 dBm Manual operation See Source Power on page 98 SOURce EXTernal STATe lt State gt This command activates or deactivates the connected external generator Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Source State on page 98 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet Offset This command defines a level offset for the external generator level Thus for exam ple attenuators or amplifiers at the output of the external generator can be taken into account for the setting Parameters lt Offset g
246. erload This bit is set if the sample rate on the connected instrument is higher than the input sam ple rate setting on the R amp S FSW Possible solution e Reduce the sample rate on the connected instrument e Increase the input sample rate setting on the R amp S FSW not used Digital UO Output Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital UO Output Digital UO Output Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 10 11 Digital UO Output Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred while the connection between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex 1 Q Box is established Digital UO Output FIFO Overload This bit is set if an overload of the Digital UO Output FIFO occurred This happens if the output data rate is higher than the maximal data rate of the connected instrument Reduce the sample rate to solve the problem 12 14 not used 15 This bit is always set to 0 User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 323 Querying the Status Registers STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDion nnne 324 STATUus QUEStoRabIeDIQENABIG coa ei ce ee co en e eene 324 STATUs QUEStionable DIG JN TIRGPISIOFL EE 324 STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRARSIHGE eiua ter aeta e Pra nan eu era eter xar o ae k
247. ers lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 TRIG ON Switches the external power trigger on Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 108 Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 10 4 4 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 252 Ree EE 236 ie pem psisilirr air id e ii 236 OUTPURIFAPFREGUGNOY ni A AAA AAA A 237 QCUTPUEIFASBANOR icono Ae 237 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce lt State gt This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the front panel on and off For details see chapter 5 4 6 Input from Noise Sources on page 60 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 113 OUTPut IF SOURce lt Source gt Defines the type of signal sent to the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW The command is only available in the time domain Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements For restrictions and more information see chapter 5 4 8 IF and Video Signal Output on page 61 Parameters lt Source gt IF Sends the measured IF value to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector The frequency at which the IF value is sent is defined using the OUTPut IF IFFRequency command IF2 Sends the measured IF value to the IF 2 GHZ OUT output con nector at a frequency of 2 GHz
248. es External Mixer B21 90 Values External Mixer B21 sssssss 90 Copying Measurement channel remote 181 Coupling Automatic external generator 56 99 Frequencies external generator n 55 Input remote m Manual external generator oococoonocccinoccccconccconannccnnnnos 99 D Data acquisition Configuring remote ssss 257 Errors UO Analyzer ee 21 UO data remote AA 276 MSRA MSRT m SS SLUNG S xs sates sae H dee We WEE 173 Data format ASTM ve eege 335 SII Amp 335 ioc 312 Data output 3TiroubleshoOtig WE 173 DC offset Analog Baseband B71 remote control 197 Decimation DEP AAA A 21 lcg 35 Default values xii RR TEM 72 Della markers EE 153 DENNO EE 153 Demodulation A can erncescesncavepnerseeneencsiiranseesnso 142 Denominator Frequencies external generator 56 99 Detectors Remote COMMON P 285 e Le 149 Diagram area Hardware e E 11 Diagram footer information ssseee 12 Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control 195 Analog Baseband B71 sse 94 DiglConf Softkey see also R amp S DiglConf 92 Digital Baseband Interface B17 alle trio TEE BASICS EN Connected instrument
249. es the configuration software R amp S DiglConf which can be installed directly on the R amp S FSW The software R amp S Dig IConf Digital Interface Configurator for the R amp S EX IQ BOX version 2 10 or higher controls the protocol data and clock settings of the R amp S EX IQ BOX independently from the connected R amp S instrument Besides basic functions of the user defined proto cols this software utility supports the settings for standardized protocols as e g CPRI OBSAI or DigRF Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN to the R amp S FSW in addition to the R amp S Digital Baseband Interface connection Remote control is possible and very simple Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S EX IQ BOX automatically via the USB connection A setup file included in delivery consists of an installation wizard the executable pro gram and all necessary program and data files The latest software versions can be downloaded free of charge from the R amp S website www rohde schwarz com en prod ucts test and measurement signal generation EX IQ Box Simply execute the Setup file and follow the instructions in the installation wizard Note When using the EX IQ BOX with Digital WO Enhanced Mode see Digital UO enhanced mode on page 34 an R amp S EX IQ BOX model 1409 5505K04 with a serial number higher than 10200 is req
250. etween 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 248 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Source Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 248 Slope Trigger Source For all trigger sources except time and frequency mask Realtime only you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 250 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger Settings Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connector Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 253 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 252 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of
251. ex User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 5 Documentation Overview 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the Y icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the
252. f erence line indicated by a red line in the diagram By default the reference line is dis played at the top of the diagram If you shift the reference line the normalized trace is shifted as well Shifting the reference line and normalized trace You can shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace in the result display by changing the Reference Position or the Reference Value MultiView Rel Leve RBW 2 MHz Att SWT 3ms VBW 2 MHz NOR Ext T 1 Frequency Sweep 100 0 MHz 1001 pts 20 0 MHz 300 0 MHz Fig 5 18 Shifted reference line Ifthe DUT inserts a gain or an attenuation in the measurement this effect can be reflected in the result display on the R amp S FSW To reflect a power offset in the mea surement trace change the Reference Value 5 4 4 7 Coupling the Frequencies As described in chapter 5 4 4 5 Normalization on page 53 normalized measure ment results are very accurate as long as the same settings are used as for calibration Although approximate normalization is possible it is important to consider the required frequencies for calibration in advance The frequencies and levels supported by the connected signal generator are provided for reference with the interface configuration User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 55 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Two different methods are available to define the frequencies for calibration that is to couple the frequencies of the R amp S
253. f available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 182 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 182 Example INST CRE REPL Spectrum2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named Spectrum2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activated Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL Spectrum4 Deletes the spectrum channel with the name Spectrum4 INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer SANALYZER
254. f the allowed frequency ranges of the generator are exceeded an error message is displayed on the R amp S FSW and the values for Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop are corrected to comply with the range limits The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator The default setting is O Hz Offsets lt gt O Hz are indicated by the FRQ label in the channel bar Negative offsets can be used to define reverse sweeps Data Input and Output Settings For more information on coupling frequencies and reverse sweeps see chapter 5 4 4 7 Coupling the Frequencies on page 55 For more information on error messages and the channel bar see chapter 5 4 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 58 Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator on page 216 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator on page 217 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet on page 217 Result Frequency Start For reference only The start frequency for the generator calculated from the config ured generator frequency and the start value defined for the R amp S FSW Result Frequency Stop For reference only The stop frequency for the generator calculated from the config ured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the R amp S FSW Source Calibration Functions The calibration functions of the external generator are available in the Source Calibra tion subtab of the External Generator tab but only if
255. f transferred from connected device If not available 9 97637 is returned INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 0ut A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 See Connected Instrument on page 92 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO lt State gt If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 92 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling lt State gt If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 92 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer lt Level gt Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt Range 1pV to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page
256. face R amp S FSW B17 For input from the Analog Baseband Interface RSS FSW B71 this parameter is interpreted as BBPower for compatibility reasons IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process l Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 TIME Time interval BBPower Baseband power for digital input via the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 Baseband power for digital input via the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 PSEN External power sensor RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 108 See Trigger Source on page 128 See Free Run on page 128 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 128 See Video on page 128 See IF Power on page 129 See Baseband Power on page 129 See UO Power on page 129 See Digital l Q on page 130 See RF Power on page 130 See Power Sensor on page 131 See Time on page 131 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters Interval 2 0 ms to 5000 Range 2ms to 5000 s RST 1 0s
257. finition RST 2 for band F Example MIX HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 83 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH lt Average gt This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high sec ond range Parameters lt Average gt numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS HIGH 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 83 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the high second range Parameters lt FileName gt string file name gt Example MIX LOSS TABL HIGH MyCVLTable Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 83 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low first range Parameters lt FileName gt string file name gt Example MIX LOSS TABL mix 1 4 Specifies the conversion loss table mix 1 4 Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 83 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low first range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 83 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SENSe MIX
258. fix lt m gt in remote commands All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 290 General Marker Settings Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all mark ers These settings are located in the Marker Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab Then select the horizontal Marker Settings tab 7 2 2 Marker Usage Markers Marker Settings Search Settings Marker Table teference Fixed Off State Off On Level 200 dBm Frequency 13 25 GHz Sweep Points Peak Search Marker Table Display rcnt tn ett ita 155 Mamer sionis 155 Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTAB1e on page 291 Marker Stepsize Defines the size of the steps that the marker position is moved using the rotary knob Standard The marker position is moved from pixel to pixel on
259. for the end of the sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the I Q Analyzer channel Usage Event SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to lt Record length gt RST 0 10 7 5 IO Analysis Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 139 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only In MSRT operating mode only the MSRT Master actually captures data the MSRT applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRT applica tions For the I Q Analyzer application the commands to define the analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 10 4 5 Config uring Data Acquisition on page 257 Be sure to select the correct measurement chan nel before executing these commands In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the capture
260. formation on the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 if available If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed e Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face e Used port Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 194 Amplitude The amplitude is configured in the Amplitude dialog box Amplitude settings are iden tical to the Spectrum application except for a new scaling function for UO Vector and Real Imag results see Y Axis Max on page 124 For background information on amplitude settings see the R amp S FSW User Manual Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings determine how the R amp S FSW must process or display the expected input power levels Amplitude settings for input from the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 are described in chapter 6 5 2 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input on page 120 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration To configure the amplitude settings Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box gt To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then switch to the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Amplitude Reference Level Input Settings Value 0 0 dBm Preamplifier Offset 0 0 dB Input Coupling Uni
261. g in the Data Aquisition dialog box in the I Q Analyzer application and which is used as the basis for analysis or sent to the digital output e Usable UO Analysis bandwidth the bandwidth range in which the signal remains unchanged by the digital decimation filter and thus remains undistorted this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW Slowl Q measurements When captured data is transferred and further processed with a slower rate than the rate with which the signal was sampled this is referred to as a Slow I Q measurement For example assume an analog signal is sampled by an oscilloscope with a sample rate of 10 GHz This data is stored in a memory temporarily and then transferred to the R amp S FSW via the Digital UO Interface with a sample rate of 100R amp S FSWMsps Then the input sample rate on the R amp S FSW must be set to 10 GHz so the signal is dis played correctly CH Digital UO enhanced mode As of firmware version 1 80 an enhanced mode for processing data from the Digital Baseband Interface is available This enhanced mode enables data transfer via the Digital UO interface with a data rate of up to 200 Msps 160 MHz bandwidth compared to the previous 100 Msps 80 MHz bandwidth The Digital UO enhanced mode is automatically used if the following prerequisites are fulfilled e Digital Input The connected device must support data transfer rates up to 200 Msps e Digital Output The R amp S
262. g IF A D fractional filter converter resampling analyzer IF UA A i gt Application signal sample rate Downsampling filters 200 MHz sampling clock RF IF Power or External Trigger arbitrary sample rate 100Hz 10 GHz Fig 5 1 Block diagram illustrating the R amp S FSW signal processing for analog l Q data without band width extension options Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input Data aquisition hardware digital down conversion continuous decimation analog IF A D filter resampling analyzer IF Downsampling filters 1 GHz sampling clock arbitrary sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz External Trigger Fig 5 2 Block diagram illustrating the R amp S FSW signal processing for analog l Q data with option B160 Data aquisition hardware analog IF AJD filter converter analyzer IF Ll Application signal 9 External Trigger sample rate 1GHz sampling clock Fig 5 3 Block diagram illustrating the R amp S FSW signal processing for analog l Q data with option B320 Data aquisition hardware digital down conversion continuous decimation analog IF AID x fractional converter resampling analyzer IF Application signal sample rate m Downsampling 1 2 GHz sampling clock arbitrary sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz External Trigger Fig 5 4 Block diagram illustrating the R amp S FSW signal processing for analog l Q data with option B500 R amp S FSW
263. g the TRAC DATA or TRAC IQ DATA command the data is returned in the format defined using the FORMat DATA The possible for mats are described here e ASCII Format FORMat ASCII The data is stored as a list of comma separated values CSV of the measured val ues in floating point format e Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 335 Reference Format Description for UO Data Files The data is stored as binary data Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE 488 2 each measurement value being formatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point Format The schema of the result string is as follows 41024 lt valuel gt lt value2 gt lt value n with 4 number of digits 4 in the example of the following number of data bytes 1024 number of following data bytes 1024 in the example lt Value gt 4 byte floating point value Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format Thus binary format is recommended for large amounts of data A 3 Reference Format Description for UO Data Files This section describes how UO data is transferred to the memory during remote control see TRACe 10 DATA FORMat on page 310 command For details on the format of the individual values see chapter A 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 335 For details on the format of UO export files using the UO Export function see the R amp S
264. ger In Out Source Free Run Drop Out Time Offset 0 0 s Slope Rising Falling Hysteresis Holdoff External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box 0 Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger 2 e Output Output Type User Defined E Low Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger Jt Trigger 3 Input e Output Conventional gating as in the Spectrum application is not available for the UO Ana lyzer however a special gating mode is available in remote control see chap ter 10 4 4 3 Configuring UO Gating on page 254 For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual Beete 128 A o A ate DET 128 L Free un 128 L Extemal Tigger V23 NEUTER TENTE 128 uo Ec 128 A reunite AES 129 L Baseband POWOL ccce tt entere cocti ee rit bee aet 129 Md 1 A m 129 Qo l 130 BM Jo oe 130 L Power BEBO animado 131 A Seana Sede cca dea ase lac tnaa tga iad usta 131 o eene Eeer 131 L Repetition URIS E 131 L Drop OUt EE 131 EM dun 132 A o il bilidad 132 A OT 132 A 132 AAG GON A UM 132 EOI NI C RE EET 133 A IN 133 Bio 16 A 133 L Send Eege Eet 134 Trigger Settings Trigger Source The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Source Defines the trigger source If a trigger source o
265. gital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 78 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 78 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 79 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for UO Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 79 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input 75 Q should be selec
266. gital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 If enabled no digital decimation filter is used during data acquisition Thus the Analy sis Bandwidth is identical to the input sample rate configured for the Digital UO input source see Input Sample Rate on page 91 Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings Note however that in this case noise artifacts and the second IF side band may not be suppressed in the captured l Q data Remote command TRACe IQ DIQFilter on page 261 Meas Time Defines the UO acquisition time By default the measurement time is calculated as the number of UO samples Record Length divided by the sample rate If you change the measurement time the Record Length is automatically changed as well For details on the maximum number of samples see also chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 24 Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 281 Record Length Defines the number of UO samples to record By default the number of sweep points is used The record length is calculated as the measurement time multiplied by the sam ple rate If you change the record length the Meas Time is automatically changed as well Note For the UO vector result display the number of UO samples to record Record Length must be identical to the number of trace points to be displayed Sweep Points Thus the sweep points are not editable for this result display If
267. gital Baseband Output on page 115 the sample rate is restricted to 200 MHz max 160 MHz usable UO bandwidth The figure 5 5 shows the maximum usable UO bandwidths depending on the output sample rates R amp S FSW without additional bandwidth extension options sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum UO bandwidth 10 MHz Table 5 2 Maximum I Q bandwidth Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 10 MHz proportional up to maximum 10 MHz 10 MHz to 10 GHz 10 MHz R amp S FSW with options B28 or U28 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 28 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 35 MHz proportional up to maximum 28 MHz 35 MHz to 10 GHz 28 MHz R amp S FSW with option B40 or U40 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 40 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 50 MHz proportional up to maximum 40 MHz 50 MHz to 10 GHz 40 MHz R amp S FSW with option B80 or U80 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 80 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 100 MHz proportional up to maximum 80 MHz 100 MHz to 10 GHz 80 MHz Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input R amp S FSW with activated option B160 or U160 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 160 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth
268. gle ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Differential Q and inverse I Q data Single Ended Q data only Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 195 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input I or Q only the center frequency is always O Hz Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth For details on frequency ranges and the analysis bandwidth see chapter 5 3 Process ing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface on page 37 Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 244 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration Er 6 4 1 6 Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when you select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config Input Source Power Sensor Probes Probe I Name RT 2530 Serial Number 1410 4309 02 Part Number 101241 Not Present Type Single Ended Microbutton Action Run Single For each possible probe connector Baseband Input Baseband Input Q the detec ted type of probe if any is displayed The follow
269. gt Serial number of a connected power sensor Query parameters lt Type gt The power sensor type e g NRP Z81 lt Interface gt Currently not evaluated Return values lt Placeholder gt Currently not used lt Type gt Detected power sensor type e g NRP Z81 lt Interface gt Interface the power sensor is connected to always USB Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements lt SerialNo gt Serial number of the power sensor assigned to the specified index Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF NRP Z81 123456 Assigns the power sensor with the serial number 123456 to the configuration Power Sensor 2 SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF Queries the sensor assigned to Power Sensor 2 Result NRP Z81 USB 123456 The NRP Z81 power sensor with the serial number 123456 is assigned to the Power Sensor 2 Manual operation See Select on page 106 Configuring Power Sensor Measurements CALibration PMETer p ZERO AUTO ONE 227 CAL Culate nz PME Tercps REL atvel MACGhNitudel cece eee ce cee ae eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 228 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE oococcccccncnccnnnnnnncnnnonininninons 228 CALOCulate n PMETer p RELative STATe essere rennen nennt 228 EE ME 229 READIPMET Sp iia nna a E T AE E N ANT AEE TEEN aaa 229 SENSe PMETer p gt ele CT E cuina din 229 SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle VALU8 cooooccccccono
270. gth Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 254 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 254 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration pamm um lt 2 A _ lt 6 4 4 Digital UO Output Settings The optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 allows you to output l Q data from any R amp S FSW application that processes UO data to an external device The con figuration settings for digital UO output can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dialog box o Digital output is not available if the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 is active Output Meas Time 31 28ius SRate 2 Mo WN Output Digital IQ Digital Baseband Output Output Settings Max Sample Rate 100 MHz Sample Rate 32 MHz Full Scale Level 0 dBm Connected
271. he follow ing sections R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Welcome to the UO Analyzer Application MultiView Spectrum Spectrum 2 IQ Analyzer Ref Level 0 00 r AQT 1 3 SRate 32 0 MHz Att IUE Freq 3 MHz RecLength spear 12 CF 30 0 MHz 5 1001 pts Span 32 0 MHz Fig 2 1 Screen elements in the l Q Analyzer application 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area with marker information 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on result display 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA and MSRT operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored background of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA MSRT operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Channel bar information In the UO Analyzer application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar for the I Q Analyzer application Ref Level Reference level m el Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Ref Offset Reference level offset Freq Center frequency Meas Tim
272. he following interfaces are currently supported e GPIB e TCP IP not by all generators Data Input and Output Settings For details on which signal generators support which interfaces see the documenta tion of the corresponding signal generator Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface on page 219 TTL Handshake If available for the specified generator type this option activates TTL synchronization via handshake for GPIB connections Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator For more information on TTL synchronization see TTL synchronization on page 57 For an overview of which generators support TTL synchronization see chapter 5 4 4 2 Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option on page 50 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK on page 220 GPIB Address TCP IP Address For LAN connections TCP IP address of the signal generator For GPIB connections GPIB address of the signal generator Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess on page 219 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess on page 220 Reference Selects the internal R amp S FSW or an external frequency reference to synchronize the R amp S FSW with the generat
273. he frequency range for user defined bands see Band on page 82 Harmonic Type Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines if only even only odd or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion Depending on this selection the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes see Harmonic Order on page 83 Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE on page 204 Range 1 2 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Enables the use of a second harmonic to cover the band s frequency range For each range you can define which harmonic to use and how the Conversion loss is handled Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe on page 203 Harmonic Order Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines which of the available harmonic orders of the LO is used to cover the fre quency range By default the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows con version of input signals in the whole band If due to the LO frequency the conversion is not possible using one harmonic the band is split For the band USER the order of harmonic is defined by the user The order of har monic can be between 2 and 61 the lowest usable frequency being 26 5 GHz Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW on page 204 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue on page 204 Conversion loss Mixer Settings Harmonic
274. he signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 145 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer lt Threshold gt When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 269 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted automatically Parameters Threshold Range O0 dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 144 SENSe ADJust CONF igure TRIG State Defines the behaviour of the measurement when adjusting a setting automatically using SENS ADJ LEV ON for example See Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements on page 143 Parameters State ON 1 The measurement for automatic adjustment waits for the trigger OFF 0 The measurement for automatic adjustment is performed imme diately without waiting for a trigger RST 1 SENSe ADJust FREQuency This command set
275. her 3 Requires the option SMR B11 5 4 4 3 5 4 4 4 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SMIQO6B X HP8257D SMJ03 X HP8340A SMJ06 X HP8648 SMLO01 HP ESG A Series 1000A 2000A 3000A 4000A SML02 HP ESG B Sereies SMLO3 HP ESG D SERIES E4432B 1 Requires firmware version V2 10 x or higher 2 Requires firmware version V1 10 x or higher 3 Requires the option SMR B11 Generator Setup Files For each signal generator type to be controlled by the R amp S FSW a generator setup file must be configured and stored on the R amp S FSW The setup file defines the frequency and power ranges supported by the generator as well as information required for com munication For the signal generators listed in chapter 5 4 4 2 Overview of Genera tors Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option on page 50 default setup files are provi ded If necessary these files can be edited or duplicated for varying measurement set ups or other instruments The existing setup files can be displayed in an editor in read only mode directly from the External Generator configuration dialog box From there they can be edited and stored under a different name and are then available on the R amp S FSW For details see the R amp S FSW User Manual Calibration Mechanism A common measurement setup includes a signal generator a device under
276. iagram border Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 157 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits ZOOM STATe lt State gt This command adjusts the marker search range to the zoom area Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ZOOM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Using Zoom Limits on page 158 CALCulate THReshold Level This command defines a threshold level for the marker peak search Parameters Level Numeric value The value range and unit are variable RST 120 dBm Example CALC THR 82DBM Sets the threshold value to 82 dBm 10 7 2 4 IO Analysis Manual operation See Search Threshold on page 157 CALCulate THReshold STATe lt State gt This command turns a threshold for the marker peak search on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC THR STAT ON Switches on the threshold line Manual operation See Deactivating All Search Limits on page 158 Positioning the Marker This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace e Positionlrig Normal Markers cansino En AASS aaa 295 e Positioning Delta Markers oric
277. if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana lyzer Source Freq RF _ Numerator Offset Denominator Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Example SOUR EXT FREQ NUM 4 SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 3 Sets a multiplication factor of 4 3 i e the transmit frequency of the generator is 4 3 times the analyzer frequency Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 99 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator lt Value gt This command defines the numerator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana lyzer Source Freq RF Numerator Offset Denominator Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ NUM 4 SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 3 Sets a multiplication factor of 4 3 i e the transmit frequency of the generator is 4 3 times the analyzer frequency Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 99 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines the frequency offset of the gen
278. ig gered due to a sweep start Device Triggered or when the R amp S FSW is ready to receive a trigger signal after a sweep start Trigger Armed Manual triggering If the trigger output signal is initiated manually the length and level high low of the trigger pulse is also user definable Note however that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual IF and Video Signal Output The measured IF signal or displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF sig nal can be sent to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector The video output is a signal of 1 V It can be used for example to control demodula ted audio frequencies The IF output is a signal of the measured level at a specified frequency Restrictions Note the following restrictions for IF output e IF and video output is only available in the time domain zero span e For HO data only IF output is available e F output is not available if any of the following conditions apply The Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active for input or output MSRA operating mode is active MSRT operating mode is active A wideband extension i
279. ig button and select up to six displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 9 Exit the SmartGrid mode 10 Start a new sweep with the defined settings In MSRA MSRT mode you may want to stop the continuous measurement mode by the Sequencer and perform a single data acquisition a Select the Sequencer icon E from the toolbar b Set the Sequencer state to OFF c Press the RUN SINGLE key 8 1 2 How to Analyze Data in the UO Analyzer 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the I Q Analyzer application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for an UO Analyzer mea surement 3 Select the Display Config button and select up to six displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 4 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 5 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps on the Trace tab if necessary increase the Average Count e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the signal on the Marker tab How to Capture or Output UO Data via Optional Interfaces 8 2 How to Capture or Output I Q Data via Optional Inter 8 2 1 faces The following step by step instruct
280. igger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 113 See Level on page 114 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear 10 4 4 3 0 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 114 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 114 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2
281. ignal analysis on that data using the R amp S FSW VSA application if availa ble As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values 1 Q data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 62 Basics on FFT complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The UO data is stored in a format with the file extension iq tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the El Save or EI Open icon in the toolbar see chap ter 6 3 Import Export Functions on page 75 Export only in MSRA mode In MSRA mode UO data can only be exported to other applications I Q data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications 5 6 Basics on FFT The I Q Analyzer measures the power of the signal input over time In order to convert the time domain signal to a frequency spectrum an FFT Fast Fourier Transformation is performed which converts a vector of input values into a discrete spectrum of fre quencies V A FFT HZ 5 6 1 Window Functions The Fourier transformation is not performed on the entire captured data in one step Only a limited number of samples is used to calculate an individual result This process is called wi
282. ine MSRA mode only 304 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only 307 Configuring Standard Traces Useful commands for trace configuration described elsewhere e DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SPACing on page 243 e DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe on page 242 Remote commands exclusive to trace configuration DISPlayEWINDowens TRAGBSESMODE certe iret aee t ee tenete 283 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztTR ACectMODE HCOhNtnuous nennen 284 DISPlay WINDow n TTRAGCest STATe 2 crinem nnn rin innt 284 SENSe AVERagesn t A EE 284 ISENGe JiuINDow nz JDETechor iracezfEUNGCon nnn 285 IO Analysis SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCtion AUTO cessere 285 NIRA doo OP eM M IUE 285 SENSe AVERags GOUNL 2 1 1er ete court ea Ee 286 TRAGeIOAVERage COUNE it 286 EE ERR RE 286 TRACelO AVERage STATO EE 286 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous
283. ine nanas aA Ea EEEa 297 Positioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzMANimum AUTO 295 CAL Culate nz M bkermz M Aximum LEET 296 CAL Culate nz M AbkermzMAximumNENT esee ennn na esnh sns s nent snas 296 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm MAXimumf PDEAK enne 296 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzMANimumbRlGHt esee enean nnns s nnns ian 296 CAL Culate nz M bkermmz MiNimum AUTO 296 CAL Culate nz M Abkermmz MiNimum LEET 297 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz MiNimumNENT nennen sean sns nnns i 297 CALOCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK cecinere 297 CAL Culate nz M Abker mmz MiNimum RI 297 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum AUTO lt State gt This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace maximum on and off The R amp S FSW performs the peak search after each sweep Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK MAX AUTO ON Activates the automatic peak search function for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep IO Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 156 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the
284. ing information is provided for each connected probe e Probe name e Serial number e R amp S part number e Type of probe Differential Single Ended For more information on using probes with an R amp S FSW see the R amp S FSW User Manual For general information on the R amp S9RTO probes see the device manuals MIGKODUTOR e E cita a dada 95 Microbutton Action Active R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton Remote command SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE on page 213 6 4 1 7 External Generator Control Settings The External Generator settings are available in the Input dialog box if the R amp S FSW External Generator Control option R amp S FSW B10 is installed For each measurement channel one external generator can be configured To switch between different configurations define multiple measurement channels User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 95 Data Input and Output Settings To display this dialog box press the INPUT OUPUT key and then select External Generator Config For more information on external generator control see chapter 5 4 4 Basics on Exter nal Generator Control
285. ing is performed Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 277 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering starts the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer If the Sequencer is active in MSRT mode the Single Sweep function does not start data capturing it merely has an effect on trace averaging over multiple sequences In this case no trace averaging is performed Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 141 6 9 6 10 Display Configuration If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated For details on the Se
286. ings Note For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the base band power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid uninten tional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 247 Trigger Offset Trigger Source Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for zero span e g UO Analyzer application and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretriggerimax sweep time When using the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 the maximum range is limi ted by the number of pretrigger samples See table 5 5 Tip To determine the trigger point in the sample for External or IF Power trigger source use the TRACe 10 TPISample command For the Time trigger source this function is not available Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 247 Hysteresis Trigger Source Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is b
287. input connector of the DUT The input of the R amp S FSW is fed from the output of the DUT A calibration can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup e g frequency response of connecting cables GEN OUTPUT DUT RF INPUT Fig 5 16 Test setup for transmission measurement Reflection Measurement Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out using a reflection coefficient mea surement bridge Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output GEN OUTPUT Bridge RF INPUT DUT Fig 5 17 Test setup for reflection measurement Generated signal input In order to use the functions of the external generator an appropriate generator must be connected and configured correctly In particular the generator output must be con nected to the RF input of the R amp S FSW External reference frequency In order to enhance measurement accuracy a common reference frequency should be used for both the R amp S FSW and the generator If no independent 10 MHz reference frequency is available it is recommended that you connect the reference output of the generator with the reference input of the R amp S FSW and that you enable usage of the external reference on the R amp S FSW via SETUP gt Reference gt External Refer ence For more information on external references see the Instrument Setup section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Connection errors If no external generator is connected if the connection address is
288. ion e Frequency counter marker e Gated measurement e Video trigger Default Settings for UO Analyzer measurements 6 Configuration The I Q Analyzer is a special application on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key on the front panel When you switch to an I Q Analyzer measurement channel the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application see chapter 6 1 Default Settings for l Q Analyzer measurements on page 72 After initial setup the param eters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re enter ing the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a measurement channel for the I Q Analyzer application data acquisition from the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration It can be configured in the UO Analyzer Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu The main configuration settings and dialog boxes are also available via the I Q Ana lyzer menu which is displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 10 Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data on page 174 Importing and Exporting UO Data The I Q data to be evaluated in the UO Analyzer application can not only be captured by the UO Analyzer itself it can also be imported to the R am
289. ion in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note that the normalized measurement data is stored not the original reference trace Thus if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration without changing any settings the transducer factor will be 0 dB for the entire span by definition of the nor malized trace Reference Trace Reference Line and Reference Level Reference trace The calibration results are stored internally on the R amp S FSW as a reference trace For each measured sweep point the offset to the expected values is determined If normali zation is activated the offsets in the reference trace are removed from the current measurement results to compensate for the inherent distortions R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing SS AAA A A A A A A A AA A A A A AAA A AA AA AAA Reference line The reference line is defined by the Reference Value and Reference Position in the External Generator gt Source Calibration settings It is similar to the Reference Level defined in the Amplitude settings However as opposed to the reference level this reference line only affects the y axis scaling in the diagram it has no effect on the expected input power level or the hardware settings The reference line determines the range and the scaling of the y axis just as the refer ence level does The normalized reference trace 0 dB directly after calibration is displayed on this re
290. ions demonstrate how to capture l Q data on the R amp S FSW using the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 e Howto Capture Data via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 EE 166 e Howto Capture Analog Baseband Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Inter face RES FOWE EE 167 e Howto Capture Data from the Optional Baseband Input Connectors R amp S FSW B MaS RF Input a neret nete ate be are id 169 e How to Output UO Data via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW PME M 170 How to Capture Data via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Alternatively to capturing analog UO data from the standard RF Input connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW digital UO data can be captured from the optional Dig ital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 if installed The digital input and output cannot be used simultaneously 1 Connect the device that provides digital input to the DIGITAL BASEBAND INPUT connector at the rear of the R amp S FSW 2 Press the INPUT OUTPUT key on the front panel of the R amp S FSW 3 Select Input Source Config and switch to the Digital IQ tab to configure the Digi tal Baseband Interface Information on the detected input device is shown under Connected Instrument 4 Setthe state of the Digital IQ signal source to O
291. ions that require no reset after parameter changes the automatic reset can be switched off The default setting is off Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous on page 284 Trace Settings Average Mode Defines the mode with which the trace is averaged over several sweeps A different averaging mode can be defined for each trace This setting is only applicable if trace mode Average is selected How many sweeps are averaged is defined by the Sweep Average Count on page 141 Linear The power level values are converted into linear units prior to averag ing After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Logarithmic For logarithmic scaling the values are averaged in dBm For linear scaling the behavior is the same as with linear averaging Power Activates linear power averaging The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averag ing After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Use this mode to average power values in Volts or Amperes cor rectly Remote command SENSe AVERage lt n gt TYPE on page 284 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by selecting the appropriate button Function Trace Settings Preset All Traces Trace 1 Clear Write Traces 2 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trac
292. is command defines whether the position of a delta marker is provided as an abso lute value or relative to a reference marker Note that when the position of a delta marker is queried the result is always an absolute value see CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 289 Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute Delta marker position in absolute terms RELative Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker RST RELative Example CALC DELT MODE ABS Absolute delta marker position CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF lt Reference gt This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1 The reference may be another marker or the fixed reference IO Analysis Parameters lt Reference gt 1 to 16 Selects markers 1 to 16 as the reference FIXed Selects the fixed reference as the reference Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2 Manual operation See Reference Marker on page 153 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 152 See Marker Type on page 153 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker
293. ix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3dB to 50 dB Increment 1dB RST 0 dB Example PMET2 TRIG HYST 10 Sets the hysteresis of the trigger to 10 dB Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 109 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger LEVel Level This command defines the trigger level for external power triggers This command requires the use of an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Level gt 20 to 20 dBm Range 20 dBm to 20 dBm RST 10 dBm Example PMET2 TRIG LEV 10 dBm Sets the level of the trigger Manual operation See External Trigger Level on page 108 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger SLOPe lt Edge gt This command selects the trigger condition for external power triggers Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Edge gt POSitive The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a posi tive edge NEGative The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a neg ative edge RST POSitive Example PMET2 TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 109 10 4 1 9 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger STATe lt State gt This command turns the external power trigger on and off This command requires the use of an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Paramet
294. ize to the span 10 4 4 10 4 4 1 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not O Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 126 Note In MSRA MSRT mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master For MSRA MSRT applications only the query command is available Parameters lt Offset gt Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 126 Triggering The following remote commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment More details are described for manual operation in chapter 6 7 Trigger Settings on page 126 OPC should be used after requesting data This will hold off any subsequent changes to the selected trigger source until after the sweep is completed and the data is returned e Configuring the Triggering Conditions 246 e Configuring the Trigger Output 252 COMMUTE WO GANG ET 254 Configuring the Triggering Conditions REI EE ere el Be EE 247 TRIGger SEQuencelDTIMe iio a 247 TRIGgEn SEQuencel HOLDOMETIMES nia rita 247 TRlGoert GtOuencellEbower HOL Doft 248 TRIGger
295. ks ANNotation LABel STATe lt State gt This command turns labels for peaks found during a peak search on and off The labels correspond to the marker number in the marker peak list IO Analysis Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE ANN LAB STAT OFF Removes the peak labels from the diagram Manual operation See Displaying Marker Numbers on page 161 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt This command queries the number of peaks that have been found during a peak search The actual number of peaks that have been found may differ from the number of peaks you have set to be found because of the peak excursion Return values lt NumberOfPeaks gt Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN Queries the number of peaks Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate Peaks This command initiates a peak search Parameters lt Peaks gt This parameter defines the number of peaks to find during the search Note that the actual number of peaks found during the search also depends on the peak excursion you have set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion Range 1 to 200 Example CALC MARK PEXC 5 Defines a peak excursion of 5 dB i e peaks must be at least 5 dB apart to be detected as a peak CALC MARK FUNC FPE 10 Initiates a search for 10 peaks on the current trace CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks
296. lay and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 303 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 304 for each multiple zoom window Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates zoom mode Tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 303 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 304 for each multiple zoom window Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode The data that was captured by the MSRA or MSRT Master can be analyzed in the UO Analyzer application The analysis settings and functions available in MSRA MSRT mode are those descri bed for common Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Analysis line settings In addition an analysis line can be positioned The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA MSRT applications To hide or show and position the analysis line a dialog box is available To display the Analysis Line dialog box tap the AL icon in the toolbar only available in MSRA MSRT mode The current position of the analysis line is indicated on the icon Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode M Position Show Line POSO oia 163 Stee EES 163 Position Defines the position of the analysis line in the time domain The position must lie within the measurement time of the multistandard measurement Re
297. led to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This function is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 119 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly This function is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 119 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 241 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuati
298. levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 250 Baseband Power Trigger Source Trigger Source Defines triggering on the baseband power for baseband input via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 For more information on the Digital Baseband Interface see chapter 5 2 Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 on page 30 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface see chapter 5 3 Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface on page 37 Remote command TRIG SOUR BBP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 250 UO Power Trigger Source Trigger Source This trigger source is only available in the UO Analyzer application and in applications that process UO data This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is used for input It is also not available for analysis bandwidths gt 160 MHz Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold Trigger Settings The trigger bandwidth corresponds to the bandwidth setting for UO data acquisition
299. lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat gt Element Description RS IQ TAR File The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion Format that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd 1 Q Data File Format iq tar Element Samples Description Contains the number of samples of the UO data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values e Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the I Q data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the 1 Q data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format S
300. lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and I Q Input Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data eS SS AA ES SSE ESE EEE EEE EEE EEE SS EE EE Ee 1 Frequency Sweep 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 161 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 161 See Restore Original Display on page 162 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 162 10 7 3 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA ccce nennen nnn nnns 303 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple zoomzGTATe nono nanannnnnnannnn 304 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom
301. lues RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted 10 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 175 10 1 3 10 1 4 10 1 5 Introduction The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt n gt next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow D
302. lysis using the UO Analyzer in a remote environment Optional interfaces for l Q data input are also demonstrated in the UO Analyzer e Q Analysis with Graphical Evaluation eccna 326 e Basic HO Analysis with Improved Pertomance AAA 327 e Data Acquisition via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 328 e Converting an RF Signal to a Digital UO Signal via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FOWSBTT dasererat dd adi 329 Output via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 330 e Data Acquisition via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 331 Programming Examples 10 11 1 1 Q Analysis with Graphical Evaluation This example demonstrates how to configure and perform a basic UO data acquisition and analyze the data using the UO Analyzer in a remote environment da as Activating the I Q Analyzer application RST Reset the instrument INST CRE IQ IQANALYZER Creates a new measurement channel named IQANALYZER INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode TRAC IQ SRAT 32MHZ Defines the sample rate TRAC IQ RLEN 1000 Sets the record length number of samples to capture to 1000 samples TRAC IQ BWID Queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter determined by the sample rate FORM DATA REAL 32 Formats the data as 32 byte real values TRAC IQ DATA FORM IQP Lists all I values first then all Q values i
303. mand queries the current configuration and the status of the digital UO input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For details see the section Interface Status Information for the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Return values lt ConnState gt lt DeviceName gt lt SerialNumber gt lt PortName gt lt SampleRate gt lt MaxTransferRate gt lt ConnProtState gt lt PRBSTestState gt lt SampleRateType gt lt FullScaleLevel gt Example Manual operation Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected Device ID of the connected device Serial number of the connected device Port name used by the connected device Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indica ted by lt SampleRateType gt parameter Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current sample rate is displayed The level in dBm that should correspond to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 i
304. measurement data TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Selects averaging over 10 data sets TRAC TO DATA Starts the measurement and reads out the averaged data IO Analysis 10 7 2 Using Markers The following commands are available for marker settings and functions in the UO Ana lyzer application E For UO Vector displays markers are not available 10 7 2 1 e Setting Up Individual EE 287 e General Marker Settings eec setti nete eid ie i v D Ea 291 e Configuring and Performing a Marker Gearch 292 e Poshoning the MAREO oo rette ero dete Fette betur ire Epit e setae and 295 e Marker Peak LIIS reir eem iine rien eee ni dei ndi nas 299 Setting Up Individual Markers The following commands define the position of markers in the diagram cAEbCulatesmesiDELTamarker EE 287 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzUNk seen enne nen nnn en nn aa senten 287 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m1 gt LINK TOMAbkercm z senten 288 CAL CulatesmesDELTamarker MODE 20d b repe arceat bed 288 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz ME 288 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STAT cccccececenneseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeeeeanaceeenaneaaaene 289 CALCulate nz DELTamarkercmzTR ACe es ssnetnss assess iiir sss snas aan 289 Ee DER DN EE E EE 289 GALCGulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFP 0 2 c cseeccenatccecescttccueccodstaceanecttaseeccoedecnecsactnaaaeccaaats 290 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m1 gt LINK TOMAh kercm z eese enne aa an 290
305. ments in the unit dBm Remote command CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude on page 228 Use Ref Lev Offset If activated takes the reference level offset defined for the analyzer into account for the measured power see Shifting the Display Offset on page 118 If deactivated takes no offset into account Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt ROFFset STATe on page 232 Average Count Number of Readings Defines the number of readings averages to be performed after a single sweep has been started This setting is only available if manual averaging is selected Meas Time Average setting The values for the average count range from 0 to 256 in binary steps 1 2 4 8 For average count 0 or 1 one reading is performed The general averaging and sweep count for the trace are independent from this setting Results become more stable with extended average particularly if signals with low power are measured This setting can be used to minimize the influence of noise in the power sensor measurement Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage COUNt on page 231 Duty Cycle Sets the duty cycle to a percent value for the correction of pulse modulated signals and activates the duty cycle correction With the correction activated the sensor calculates the signal pulse power from this value and the mean power Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATe on page 229
306. mmand is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 218 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Example CORR REC Usage Event Manual operation See Recall on page 101 SENSe CORRection STATe State This command turns correction of measurement results normalization on and off The command is available after you have created a reference trace for the selected measurement type with SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 221 This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 218 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CORR ON Activates normalization Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Source Calibration Normalize on page 101 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator Name This command uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor with up to 1001 points The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix tra under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency The generated transducer factor can be further adapted using the commands descri bed in the Remote Commands Configuring the R amp S FSW Working with Transduc ers section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters Name lt name gt Example CORR TRA
307. mment gt This command adds a comment to a file that contains l Q data Parameters lt Comment gt String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IO STAT 1 IC R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See UO Export on page 76 MMEMory STORe IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device Querying the Status Registers For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data igq tar Stores the captured UO data to the specified file Manual operation See UO Export on page 76 10 10 Querying the Status Registers The R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer uses the standard sta
308. mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the UO Analyzer application in MSRA MSRT mode define the analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap ter 10 4 5 Configuring Data Acquisition on page 257 ele EE 135 PAV AY SUS DA lie 135 EXA tierna prince prev e b necne erroe roa o Fa oe PEE 136 Omitting the Digital Decimation Filter No Filter esee 136 auc T ia 137 e Lon EE 137 LEE 137 A eessen EENS cepts 137 Advanced FFT mode Basic SOMOS omnia 138 L Transformation Algorithm 0 cscs0ececscscsescccsesscesecssssseesecssnesesssescoeneseteatas 138 A A NR DNO 138 L EE 139 L Window Overfapi A 139 EE 139 Capture Ofi cis 139 Sample Rate Defines the UO data sample rate of the R amp S FSW This value is dependent on the defined Analysis Bandwidth and the defined signal source Up to the Maximum Bandwidth the following rule applies sample rate analysis bandwidth 0 8 For details on the dependencies see chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usa ble UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 24 In par
309. mote command CALCulate MSRA ALINe VALue on page 305 CALCulate RTMS ALINe VALue on page 307 Show Line Hides or displays the analysis line in the time based windows By default the line is displayed Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Remote command CALCulate MSRA ALINe SHOW on page 305 CALCulate RTMS ALINe SHOW on page 307 How to Perform Measurements in the UO Analyzer Application 8 How to Work with UO Data 8 1 8 1 1 The following step by step procedures demonstrate in detail how to perform various tasks when working with UO data e How to Perform Measurements in the UO Analyzer Appllcaton 164 e How to Capture or Output UO Data via Optional Intertaces 166 e How to Export and Import VQ Data 170 How to Perform Measurements in the I Q Analyzer Application The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to capture l Q data on the R amp S FSW and how to analyze data in the I Q Analyzer application How to perform a measurement in the time or frequency domain on UO data in MSRA MSRT mode only is described in the R amp S FSW MSRA MSRT User Manual e How to Capture Baseband UO Data as RF Input 164 e How to Analyze Data in the l Q Analvzer EE 165 How to Capture Baseband I Q Data as RF Input By default the UO Analyzer assumes th
310. n 5 Define the Sample Rate as provided by the connected device or select Auto mode to have it set automatically according to the detected device 6 Define the level and unit that corresponds to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 as the Full scale level or select Auto mode to have it set automatically accord ing to the input from the detected device 7 Enable the Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level option to adjust the refer ence level to input changes continuously or press the AMPT key to define the ref erence level manually Select the Amplitude Config softkey to change the refer ence level offset or to set the level automatically only once 8 2 2 10 11 How to Capture or Output I Q Data via Optional Interfaces Select the Frequency button to define the input signal s center frequency Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example a Baseband Power trigger to start capturing data only when a specific input power is exceeded Select the Bandwidth button and define the bandwidth parameters for data acqui sition e Sample rate the rate at which samples are captured or Analysis Bandwidth the span of the input signal to be captured for analysis both values are corre lated e Optionally enable No Filter to suppress the use of the digital decimation filter and increase the analysis bandwidth to the input sample rate from the connec ted de
311. n the Outputs dia log box Output Digital IQ IF Video Output IF Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 EMIDEO DEMODDUDUE A A Eaa 112 IF Wide Dut EE 113 Noise Stied eege Eed 113 EE e a A E 113 OIT ciar rl at aii i 114 uo APO 114 il 114 Ge AS 114 IF VIDEO DEMOD Output Defines the type of signal sent to the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW For restrictions and additional information see chapter 5 4 8 IF and Video Signal Out put on page 61 IF Sends the measured IF value to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nector The frequency at which this value is sent is defined in IF Wide Out Frequency on page 113 IF Out 2 Sends the measured IF value to the IF 2 GHZ OUT output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz This setting is only available for instrument models R amp S FSW43 50 67 For further prerequisites see IF 2 GHz OUTPUT on page 62 Data Input and Output Settings VIDEO Sends the displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF sig nal to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector This setting is required to send demodulated audio frequencies to the output Remote command OUTP IF VID see OUTPut 1F SOURce on page 236 OUTPut 1F2 SBANd on page 237 IF Wide Out Frequency Defines or indicates the frequency at which the IF signal level is sent to the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector if F VIDEO DEMOD Output is set to IF Note The IF ou
312. n the same x position Linking is off by default Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the differ ence e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt ml1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt on page 290 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m1 gt LINK TO MARKer lt m2 gt on page 288 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK on page 287 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace The marker can also be assigned to the currently active trace using the Marker to Trace softkey in the Marker menu d Marker Usage If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 290 Select Marker Opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or more markers quickly 5 Select Marker e YEAR Selected State Selected State Selected State mater on or Con Kol vera 12 Ro on E EB EX ETIN o al gt gt LS Con Recall oeaio Mo al oeaio Pon Ra Remote command Marker selected via suf
313. n the trace results TRAC IQ AVER ON Defines averaging for the I Q trace TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Defines an average over 10 sweeps DISP TRAC1 MODE WRIT DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC3 MODE MINH Changes the trace modes INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished TRAC DATA TRACE1 TRAC DATA TRACE2 TRAC DATA TRACE3 Returns the magnitude for each sweep point LAY REPL WIND 1 RIMAG Changes the result display to Real Imag I Q 10 11 2 Programming Examples CALC MARK SEAR MAGN Configures searches to search both I and Q branches CALC MARK Y Queries the result of the peak search on both branches TRAC IQ DATA MEM 0 500 Returns the first 500 samples of the stored I Q data for the measurement For each sample first the I value then the Q value is listed TRAC 1Q DATA MEM 500 500 Returns the second half of the 1000 captured sample values Basic UO Analysis with Improved Performance This example demonstrates how to configure and perform a basic I Q data acquisition and analyze the data using the UO Analyzer in a remote environment Eeer Activating the I Q Analyzer application RST Reset the instrument INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode TRACE IQ ON Switches the operating mode of the current measurement channel to I Q Analyzer while retaining the relevant parameters from the Spectrum mode TRACE
314. ncy Start Result Frequency Stop SOLI Ge SUAS EE 98 SOUNGE POW CF RM 98 OUNCE PIER 98 source Frequency COMBINA accep eee adt atn n Doce acre Rau ata annaa 99 Manual SOUNCE E Te e Etre tt o ente Gate mbar 99 Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset 99 Result e Ee EE 100 PRES UII RECURS INCY So euo edocet at ees aet eebe 100 Source State Activates or deactivates control of an external generator Remote command SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 218 Source Power The output power of the external generator The default output power is 20 dBm The range is specified in the data sheet Remote command SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVel on page 218 Source Offset Constant level offset for the external generator Values from 200 dB to 200 dB in 1 dB steps are allowed The default setting is 0 dB Offsets are indicated by the LVL label in the channel bar see also chapter 5 4 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 58 Data Input and Output Settings With this offset attenuators or amplifiers at the output connector of the external gener ator can be taken into account for the displayed output power values on screen or dur ing data entry for example Positive offsets apply to an amplifier and negative offsets to an attenuator subsequent to the external generator Remote command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet on page 218 Source Frequency Co
315. nd fractional resampling This processing mode corresponds to the common RF spectrum analysis applied to the analog baseband input Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface Real baseband mode I or Q only As mentioned above a center frequency of 0 Hz is not allowed for low IF mode In this case the input signal is assumed to be a real baseband signal so no down conversion is performed Thus this mode resembles an oscilloscope The spectrum result display always starts at 0 and has a maximum span of half the sample rate half of the cap tured samples are from the other component which is not displayed in this mode The Real Imag result display shows only one diagram namely the one for the selected component S f B BW max 2 Fig 5 13 Spectrum in real baseband mode This mode is useful for pulse measurements for example Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Analog Baseband signals The analog baseband input is sampled internally by the R amp S FSW at a rate of 200 MHZ As a result 200 megasamples of values and 200 megasamples of Q val ues can be obtained per second The actual sample rate required by the application however may be lower in which case the data is downsampled Depending on the application used to process the data the required sample rate is defined by the appli cation itself or by the user The sample rate also determines the analysis bandwidth that is the bandwidth range in which the signal r
316. nd off If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt State gt Example Manual operation ON OFF RST OFF CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation See Search Limits Left Right on page 157 See Deactivating All Search Limits on page 158 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits LEFT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the left limit of the marker search range If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt SearchLimit gt The value range depends on the frequency range or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST left diagram border IO Analysis Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 10MHz Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 157 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits RIGHT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the right limit of the marker search range If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt Limit gt The value range depends on the frequency range or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST right d
317. ndowing After sampling in the time domain each window is multiplied with a specific window function Windowing helps minimize the discontinuities at the end of the measured sig nal interval and thus reduces the effect of spectral leakage increasing the frequency resolution Basics on FFT Various different window functions are provided in the R amp S FSW to suit different input signals Each of the window functions has specific characteristics including some advantages and some trade offs These characteristics need to be considered carefully to find the optimum solution for the measurement task O Ignoring the window function rectangular window The regtangular window function is in effect not a function at all it maintains the origi nal sampled data This may be useful to minimize the required bandwidth however be aware that if the window does not contain exactly one period of your signal heavy sidelobes may occur which do not exist in the original signal Table 5 8 Characteristics of typical FFT window functions Window type Frequency Magnitude Sidelobe sup Measurement recommendation resolution resolution pression Rectangular Best Worst Worst No function applied Separation of two tones with almost equal amplitudes and a small fre quency distance Blackman Harris Good Good Good Harmonic detection and spurious default emission detection Gauss Alpha Good Good Good Weak signals and short
318. ndwidth or by the following equa tion whichever is higher RBW Normalized Bandwidth Sample Rate max 3 If a higher spectral resolution is required the number of samples must be increased by using a higher sample rate or longer record length rer User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 67 5 6 5 Basics on FFT The minimum achievable RBW depends on the sample rate and record length accord ing to the following equation RBW NormalizedBandwidth Sample Rate im min 4096 Re cord Length To simplify operation some parameters are coupled and automatically calculated such as record length and RBW RBW mode Depending on the selected RBW mode the resolution bandwidth is either determined automatically or can be defined manually Auto mode This is the default mode in the UO Analyzer The RBW is determined automatically depending on the Sample Rate and Window Length where the window length corre sponds to the Record Length or a maximum of 4096 If the record length is larger than the window length multiple windows are combined the FFT length is 4096 A Flatop window function is used Manual mode The RBW can be defined by the user The Window Length is adapted to comply with equation 5 2 Since only window lengths with integer values can be employed the Sample Rate is adapted if necessary to obtain an integer window length value If the record length is larger than the window length multiple windows a
319. ned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 210 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Type gt string Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX FS Z60 Manual operation See Mixer Name on page 89 SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs lt PortNo gt This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 210 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 90 SENSe CORRection CVL SELect lt FileName gt This command selects the conversion loss table with the specified file name If file name is not available a new conversion loss table is created This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt FileName gt lt File name gt Example CORR CVL
320. nes the format of the input signal Parameters lt DataType gt Example Manual operation Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements IQ I Q IO The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature compo nent l The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 244 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF I Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ INP IO TYPE Q See I Q Mode on page 93 CALibration AIQ DCOFfset Offset This command defines a DC offset of the input from the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters Offset Example numeric value DC offset RST 0 Default unit V CAL AIQ DCOF I 0 001 CALibration AIQ DCOFfset Q Offset This command defines a DC offset of the Q input from the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters lt Offset gt Example numeric value DC offset RST 0 Default unit V CAL AIQ DCOF Q 0 001 Configuri
321. ng UO Analyzer Measurements SENSe PROBe lt ch gt SETup CMOFfset lt CMOffset gt Sets the common mode offset The setting is only available if a differential probe is connected to the R amp S FSW If the probe is disconnected the common mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V For details see chapter 5 4 3 1 Common Mode Offset on page 46 Suffix lt ch gt 1 4 Selects the input channel Parameters CMOffset Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Default unit V TRACe IQ APCon STATe State If enabled the average power consumption is calculated at the end of the l Q data measurement This command must be set before the measurement is performed The conversion factors A and B for the calculation are defined using TRACe 10 APCon A and TRACe IQ APCon B The results can be queried using TRACe 10 APCon RESult on page 199 For details see chapter 5 3 5 Average Power Consumption on page 43 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example RST TRAC STAT ON Q Q SRAT 1MHZ TRAC IQ RLEN 1000000 Q APC STAT ON Q APC A 3 0 TRAC IQ APC B 0 6 NIT WAI TRAC IQ APC RES TRACe IQ APCon A lt ConvFact gt Defines the conversion factor A for the calculation of the average power consumption For details see chapter 5 3 5 Average Power Consumption on page 43 Parameters lt ConvFact gt numeric value RST 1 0 10 4 1 5 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurement
322. ng UO Analyzer Measurements ana cnnnnrnnnnr nan 179 e Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements A 185 e Configuring the Result Display 269 e Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps eseeessineee eant baie 276 e IO EE 282 e Retrieving Resuhts seen nennen nennen nnne nn nns 308 e Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results 317 e Querying the Status ReglSIets retirer dea deer heec 319 Programming EXSIIIB oett eter ire eee cete T sameeren 325 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data EE gt
323. ng is used the external trigger must be applied via the connector on the rear panel of the instrument as for analog input Gating Gating is not supported for digital input 5 2 2 Digital Output Digital output can only be enabled in the UO Analyzer or Analog Demodulation applica tions see Digital Baseband Output on page 115 CD The digital input and output cannot be used simultaneously Digital output is not available if the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 is active The only data source that can be used for digital baseband output is RF input analog IF filter 5 2 3 Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 It is recommended that you use the R amp S SMU Z6 1415 0201 02 cable to connect other devices to the Digital Baseband Interface of the R amp S FSW Processing digital output Digital output is processed almost identically to RF input in UO mode see chapter 5 1 Processing Analog Q Data from RF Input on page 21 1 Q data is sampled block wise according to the defined sample rate and stored in the UO memory From the memory the UO data is processed in the I Q Analyzer mode Simultaneously the data is written to the R amp S Digital Baseband Interface continuously Using this interface the UO data can be processed in an external instrument as an alternative to internal pro cessing in the R amp S FSW Data acquisition hardware digital down conversion continuo
324. nization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 141 INITiate SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 279 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 281 Usage Event Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INTTiate IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 281 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 281 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use S
325. noncnnononananannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnncnnnco none nn rrr nnn nnns 229 SENSE PME TET pA P REQUENA peter o nera atro x te DEENEN 230 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency LINK inrer etuer ennt ununi tran aai nn EA A 230 ISGENGe JpME Ter pzMTlMe nennen nn nn 231 SENS amp PME Terep M IME AVERa9e COUNT nnne nnne nnne nnn 231 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe sss 231 SENSe PMETer p ROFFset STATe 22 annii nennen enne tnn ana 232 SENSe PMETer p STATe cerent tert tette tette tt 232 SENSeTPMETerspsaUPDatel STATS tidie eer ct ext A Ree exe edes 233 UNIT gn ENEE 233 UNI cnzs PMETercps POVWerbRAaTio neret nen enne ennt nnns nnns tnn nnn nn 233 CALibration PMETer lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE This commands starts to zero the power sensor Note that you have to disconnect the signals from the power sensor input before you start to zero the power sensor Otherwise results are invalid Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Example CAL PMET2 ZERO AUTO ONCE WAI Starts zeroing the power sensor 2 and delays the execution of further commands until zeroing is concluded Usage Event Manual operation See Zeroing Power Sensor on page 106 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude lt RefValue gt This command defines the reference value for relative measureme
326. normalized reference trace is also displayed in the spectrum diagram by default at the top of the diagram 100 of the window height It is indicated by a red line labeled NOR followed by the current reference value However it can be shifted ver tically to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT see also Shifting the reference line and normalized trace on page 55 Restoring the calibration settings If the measurement settings no longer match the instrument settings with which the calibration was performed indicated by the APX or no label next to Ext TG in the channel bar you can restore the calibration settings which are stored with the refer ence dataset on the R amp S FSW Storing the normalized reference trace as a transducer factor The inverse normalized reference trace can also be stored as a transducer factor for use in other R amp S FSW applications that do not support external generator control The normalized trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix trd under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between the start and stop frequency This is useful for example to determine the effects of a particular device component and then remove these effects from a subsequent measurement which includes this component For an example see the External Generator Control Measurement Examples sect
327. not correct or the generator is not ready for operation an error message is displayed e g Ext Genera tor TCPIP Handshake Error see chapter 5 4 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 58 5 4 4 2 Overview of Generators Supported by the R amp S FSW B10 Option Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SGS100A12 X SMP02 X SMAO1A X SMP03 X SMA100A3 x SMP04 X SMA100A6 X SMP22 X 1 Requires firmware version V2 10 x or higher 2 Requires firmware version V1 10 x or higher 3 Requires the option SMR B11 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SMB100A1 x SMR20 SMB100A12 x SMR20B11 3 X SMB100A2 X SMR27 X SMB100A20 x SMR27B11 gt X SMB100A3 x SMR30 x SMB100A40 x SMR30B11 X SMBV100A3 x SMR40 X SMBV100A6 X SMR40B11 X SMC100A1 SMR50 X SMC100A3 SMR50B11 X SME02 X SMR60 X SME03 x SMR60B11 X SMEO06 X SMT02 SMF100A x SMT03 SMF22 x SMTO06 SMF22B2 X SMUO2 X SMF43 X SMUO2B31 X SMF43B2 X SMUO3 2 X SMG SMU03B31 2 xX SMGL SMU04 X SMGU SMU04B31 2 X SMH SMUO6 2 X SMHU SMUO6B31 2 X SMIQ02 X SMV03 SMIQ02B X SMWO03 SMIQO2E SMWO06 SMIQOS3 X SMX SMIQO3B X SMY01 SMIQ03E SMY02 SMIQ04B X HP8254A 1 Requires firmware version V2 10 x or higher 2 Requires firmware version V1 10 x or hig
328. nterface R amp S FSW B71 For details on Analog Baseband input see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 78 See IQ Input File State on page 80 See Digital UO Input State on page 91 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 93 Input from UO Data Files The input for measurements can be provided from UO data files The commands required to configure the use of such files are described here Currently this input source is only available in the R amp S FSW Pulse application For details see chapter 5 4 5 Basics on Input from UO Data Files on page 59 Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere e INPut SELect on page 188 Remote commands exclusive to input from UO data files INPUERIEE PATH m 189 INPut FILE PATH lt FileName gt This command selects the UO data file to be used as input for further measurements The UO data must have a specific format as described in chapter A 4 I Q Data File Format iq tar on page 338 For details see chapter 5 4 5 Basics on Input from UO Data Files on page 59 Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file The file extension is iq tar Example INP FILE PATH C R_S Instr user data iq tar Uses UO data from the specified file as input Usage Setting only Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Manual opera
329. nterface can be used as an alternative data input source for measurements with the R amp S FSW Either an analog baseband signal is input at the BASEBAND INPUT and BASEBAND INPUT Q connectors and processed from there or an RF signal is input at the BASEBAND INPUT connector and redirected from there to the RF input path The BASEBAND INPUT connector cannot be used to input RF signals on the R amp S FSW67 RF signals via the Analog Baseband Interface For RF signals that are redirected to the RF input path the signal from the Analog Baseband Interface is processed in the same manner as for other RF input see chap ter 5 1 Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input on page 21 However a trans ducer is activated before the common process to compensate for the additional path of the redirected signal Additionally the modulated signals can be converted to any fre quency in the analysis bandwidth Complex spectrum analysis However if the input is already available as a complex baseband signal I and Q sig nals the Analog Baseband Interface allows you to analyze the complex spectrum of the baseband signal This is useful for measurements in the early stages of signal pro cessing or radio transmission when the analog baseband signal has not yet been modulated Low IF signals 1 Q input that has already been modulated Low IF signal is down converted digitally Data acquisition The Analog Baseband Interface of the R amp S
330. nting the Peak List sac E 161 Peak List State Activates deactivates the marker peak list If activated the peak list is displayed and the peaks are indicated in the trace display For each listed peak the frequency time X value and level Y value values are given Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STAT on page 301 Sort Mode Defines whether the peak list is sorted according to the x values or y values In either case the values are sorted in ascending order Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT on page 301 Maximum Number of Peaks Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE on page 300 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Zoom Functions Entries from O dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion on page 292 Displaying Marker Numbers By default the marker numbers are indicated in the diagram so you can find the peaks from the list However for large numbers of peaks the marker numbers may decrease readability in this case deactivate the marker number display Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MA
331. nts Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt RefValue gt Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 0 Example CALC PMET2 REL 30 Sets the reference value for relative measurements to 30 dBm for power sensor 2 Manual operation See Reference Value on page 108 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE This command sets the current measurement result as the reference level for relative measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE Example CALC PMET2 REL AUTO ONCE Takes the current measurement value as reference value for rel ative measurements for power sensor 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas gt Ref on page 107 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative STATe lt State gt This command turns relative power sensor measurements on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC PMET2 REL STAT ON Activates the relative display of the measured value for power sensor 2 FETCh PMETer lt p gt This command queries the results of power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Return values lt Level gt Power level that has been measured by a power sensor The unit is either dBm absolute measurements or d
332. o KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp S9FSW Multi Standard Radio Analyzer is abbreviated as R amp S FSW MSRA R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Contents 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 Contents Preface La 5 About this Manual ciooosiciccnicscnnccncricnadoner naciera a nnaspan saaa 5 Documentation Overview neon titenneieeen ne irene 6 Conventions Used in the Documentation seen 7 Welcome to the UO Analyzer Application 9 Starting the UO Analyzer Application eeeeeeeneeennneennnn nen 9 Understanding the Display Information eere nnn 10 Typical Applications for the UO Analyzer and UO Input 13 Measurement and Result Displays eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 16 Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing 21 Processing Analog U
333. o RE o mw Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and displayed in the current application Previewing the UO data in a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser 1 Use an archive tool e g WinZip amp or PowerArchiver amp to unpack the iq tar file into a folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser xzy xml Lalr file D zy xml e D x Xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV IQ Analyzer Comment Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xzy complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v How to Export and Import I Q Data 4 Drag the l Q parameter XML file e g example xm1 into your web browser Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz div E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http Avww rohde schwarz com Fileformat version 1 9 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results do not meet your expectations try the following methods to optimize the measurement Error Messages If errors occur during UO data acquisition
334. obutton Action on page 95 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Parameters Mode RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisition NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle Manual operation See Microbutton Action on page 95 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt Name gt Name string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on Le activate input from the connector use INP SEL ATO see INPut SELect on page 188 Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values State DETected NDETected RST NDETected 10 4 1 7 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the
335. offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increases the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 239 Unit Reference Level The R amp S FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impedance 50 Q or 75 Q see Impedance on page 78 conversion to other units is possible The fol lowing units are available and directly convertible e dBm dBmV dByV dBpA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 188 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 239 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the
336. og baseband input see Trigger Source on page 128 e External e Baseband power e Time e Power sensor Gating Gating is not supported for analog baseband input Calibration A special calibration signal is available for analog baseband input and can be activated in the general instrument settings If activated an internal DC or AC calibration signal is input to the Analog Baseband Interface For details see the R amp S FSW User Manual 5 3 3 I Q Processing Modes The Analog Baseband Interface provides different methods of processing the base band input UO modes depending on the measurement requirements Complex baseband mode I jQ In the default complex baseband mode the analog input signal is assumed to be a complex baseband signal There is no need to equalize any IF filter or mix the signal into the complex baseband The analog hardware just has to ensure that the final UO data stored in the capture buffer has the correct sample rate for the application The analog baseband input signal is brought to the desired sample rate using a down sampling filter and fractional resampling No level compensation is necessary The resulting data can be processed by the selected application Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface S f DW B 2 B 2 fo BW max 2 Fig 5 11 Spectrum in complex baseband I jQ mode The complex spectrum of the input signal is displayed The center frequency does not have to be
337. old minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 142 INITiate CONTinuous State This command controls the sweep mode Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Note that in single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the sweep mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 279 the mode is only con sidered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous sweep OFF 0 Single sweep RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 141 INITiate IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchro
338. omatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available Adjusting Settings Automatically MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA and MSRT operating mode settings related to data acquisition can only be adjusted automatically for the MSRA MSRT Master not the applications Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements When you select an auto adjust function a measurement is performed to determine the optimal settings If you select an auto adjust funtion for a triggered measurement you are asked how the R amp S FSW should behave e default The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger e The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger The trigger source is temporarily set to Free Run After the measurement is com pleted the original trigger source is restored The trigger level is adjusted as fol lows For IF Power and RF Power triggers Trigger Level Reference Level 15 dB For Video trigger Trigger Level 85 96 Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG on page 268 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All
339. on store it to a file and then analyze the pulse parameters for that data later using the R amp S FSW Pulse application The 1 Q data must be stored in a format with the file extension iq tar For a detailed description see chapter A A I Q Data File Format iq tar on page 338 As opposed to importing data from an UO data file using the import functions provided by some R amp S FSW applications e g the I Q Analyzer or the R amp S FSW VSA applica tion the data is not only stored temporarily in the capture buffer where it overwrites the current measurement data and is in turn overwritten by a new measurement Instead the stored UO data remains available as input for any number of subsequent measurements Furthermore the temporary data import requires the current mea surement settings in the current application to match the settings that were applied when the measurement results were stored possibly in a different application When the data is used as an input source however the data acquisition settings in the cur rent application attenuation center frequency measurement bandwidth sample rate can be ignored As a result these settings cannot be changed in the current applica R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing pam eosam ee _ __ __ _ ____ gt SS _ _ 5 4 6 5 4 7 tion Only the measurement time can be decreased in order to perform m
340. on method retra 18 UO Analyzer eee 18 Rec Length hardware setting sss 11 Recalling Calibration settings external generator 101 Record length DEMINT PER REEL 24 1 Q data Relationship to sample rate TIS Ref Level hardware setting sss 11 Ref Lvl Mkr Lvl SOMKSY T 159 Reference frequency External generator ccceseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeeaee 50 97 Reference level Auto level Digital UO External JENSTAtor 1 iconos tercio rene recens 54 91151 eiert Segen ee erste dees regen 118 121 Offset Power sensor sss 108 Offset softkey 118 121 POSION AER 124 Power sensor 107 108 SEtINgtO Marker tiroteos 159 MM aint gees 117 121 A 117 118 121 122 KI 117 121 Reference line External generator oi id Position external generator Shifting external generator Value external generator oooocccoinncccononcccconccccnnancccnnn Reference marker iii Reference trace External generator s terr etre 53 54 Storing as transducer factor external generator 54 102 Reflection measurement External generator cion eret 49 Refreshing MSRA applications remote ssssss 306 MSRT applications remote ssesse 306 Remote commands Basics ofi Syntax cernere t tene 174 Boole
341. on page 185 e Use a HiSlip or raw socket connection to export the data from the R amp S FSW to a PC e Export the data in binary format rather than ASCII format see chapter A 2 For mats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 335 e Use the Compatible or IQPair data mode see chapter A 3 Reference Format Description for UO Data Files on page 336 e If only an extract of the available data is relevant use the TRACe lt n gt DATA MEMory command to store only the required section of data e Retnevig Captured VO Dala unica ei 309 e Retrieving UO Trace Data nennen nnne snnt 312 e Retrieving Marker and Peak Search ReSUItS c cccceesccceceeessececeeeseeceteeestenee 315 Retrieving Captured UO Data The captured UO data is output in the form of a list three different formats can be selected for this list see TRACe 10 DATA FORMat on page 310 For details on formats refer to chapter A 3 Reference Format Description for UO Data Files on page 336 KK ee E KEE 309 RRE 310 TRACAIQDATA MEMOS EE 311 TRACe IQ DATA This command queries the captured data from measurements with the UO Analyzer To get the results the command also initiates a measurement with the current settings of the R amp S FSW Note Using the command with the RST values for the TRACe 10 SET command the following minimum buffer sizes for the response data are recommended ASCII format 10 kBytes
342. on that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 119 INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 119 INPut EATT STATe State This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 119 10 4 2 3 Configuring a Preamplifier INPUEGAINESTATO EE 241 INPUEGAIN EVA Luel ue oir eye ERE RR XR ERR drena oda 242 INP
343. oom E 60 113 NOR External generator iia 53 58 Normalization Approximate external generator 53 Externaligerierator tetti 53 101 Number of Readings See TEE 108 Numerator Frequencies external generator 56 99 O Offset ae IL 139 Displayed Frequency Reference level Open circuit reflection measurement Calibration external generator 101 Options Analog Baseband Interface B71 37 E M D 136 Bandwidth extension 24 26 136 Digital Baseband Interface BI 30 Electronic attenuation B25 usse 119 High pass filter B13 78 187 Preamplifier B24 sees 120 A EE 136 Output jo os 236 Configuration remote ssssssssseeese 236 Configuration softkey 111 Digital Baseband Interface BI 32 Digital Baseband Interface B17 settings 115 116 Digital Baseband Interface B17 status 194 Digital UO remote sss IF frequencies IF frequency remote IF Out Frequency IF source remote NoiSe SOURCES iasan niaaa Sree Eeer LTE UE Sample rate definition A AO MOI resina m MAS Oastei Video signal Overload External JENe
344. or default internal Remote command SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce on page 219 Edit Generator Setup File Displays the setup file for the currently selected Generator Type in read only mode in an editor Although the existing setup files are displayed in read only mode in the editor they can be saved under a different name using File SaveAs Be careful however to adhere to the required syntax and commands Errors will only be detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator see also chap ter 5 4 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 58 For details see chapter 5 4 4 3 Generator Setup Files on page 52 Frequency Min Frequency Max For reference only Lower and upper frequency limit for the generator Level Min Level Max For reference only Lower and upper power limit for the generator Data Input and Output Settings Measurement Settings The measurement settings for external generator control are configured in the Mea surement Configuration subtab of the External Generator tab Input 7 Spectrum V Input Source Power Sensor Tracking Generator L Measurement Confi Measurement Measurement Configuration Configuration 2 Interface Source Power 20 0 dBm Source Offset 0 0 aB Configuration 1 J l J Source Calibration Frequency Coupling Coupling State Numerator po e Source Freq RF H dui ow Denominator hn Result Freque
345. or must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 113 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 250 Video Trigger Source Trigger Source Defines triggering by the video signal Le the filtered and detected version of the input signal the envelope of the IF signal as displayed on the screen Trigger Settings Define a trigger level from 0 to 100 of the diagram height The absolute trigger level is indicated by a horizontal trigger line in the diagram which you can also move graphically to change the trigger level Video mode is only available in the time domain and not for I Q based data Remote command TRIG SOUR VID see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 250 IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Source The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input It is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency The available trigger
346. ort file binary data description 342 Export file parameter description 339 EXPO MING BE 72 76 Exporting remote Ole Exporting Importing 170 File format description 336 Importing ene 12 76 Importing remote esee 317 Irnporting EXpoFtflg EE 62 iei 80 Input file remote A 189 Input files 59 79 Maximum bandwidth rrr rnt nem 24 Measurements in time and frequency domain 70 Sample rate vostra cios ica 24 trigger point in sample TPIS 264 aule EET 35 Working with 164 1 Q gating eet lee ET ME Level triggered I UO measurements Ou EE 276 UO modes Analog Baseband Interface ooooonncnncninnonicccnonanacccnnos 40 UO Power neger SOftKGy iu in air 129 Trigger level remote icon 249 1 Q Vector Evaluation MOOG rrt ici 17 UO Analyzer Markers Y axis scaling IF frequency ouo m M Qutp t remote rure tre eene 236 IF Out Frequency vee MS IF output sde ve 142 ct a a 236 IF OVLD E Ee EC TEEN 53 58 IF Power Trigger SOftKey orina i 129 Trigger level remote reme 249 IF WIDE OUTPUT COMIECION P 136 IF VIDEO DEMOD CONMECION D 61 OULU cir Eea a SiS 113 Impedance le 188 SONO iria 78 Importing VO data nemen 1 Q data remote
347. oss table after you confirm the action Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr on page 207 Import Table Imports a stored conversion loss table from any directory and copies it to the instru ments C r_s instr user cv1 directory It can then be assigned for use for a specific frequency range see Conversion loss on page 83 Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables Conversion loss tables can be defined and edited in the Edit conversion loss table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Table button in the External Mixer gt Conversion loss table settings A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries Data Input and Output Settings Table File Name USERTABLE Comment User defined conversion loss table for USER band Band Settings Band NOAA FS_Z60 Harmonic Order Mixer S N 123 4567 55 00000000000 GHz 75 00000000000 GHz A ts iemdsassanansoigectansandetasiaconemserwuatecads 89 le E 89 deg We 90 POSO AMO EE AR ee EE 90 ai 90 Delete EE 90 Msi 90 SS TUS ER REESE EESTI TTL BILD LTEM 90 cp C OOO UERT 90 File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C r_s instr user cvl directory on the instrument The name of the table is identical with the name of the file without extension in which the table is stored This
348. ount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces In case of continuous sweeps the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweeps the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 141 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent This query returns the current number of started sweeps or measurements This com mand is only available if a sweep count value is defined and the instrument is in single sweep mode Example SWE COUNt 64 Sets sweep count to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT Starts a sweep without waiting for the sweep end SWE COUN CURR Queries the number of started sweeps Usage Query only SENSe SWEep POINts lt SweepPoints gt This command defines the number of measurement points analyzed during a sweep Parameters lt SweepPoints gt Range 101 to 100001 RST 1001 Example SWE POIN 251 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 140 SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the sweep or data capture time Pa
349. out SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 10 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters Index1 The index of one window the splitter controls lt Index2 gt The index of a window on the other side of the splitter E User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 273 Configuring the Result Display lt Position gt New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 10 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to th
350. ow frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 187 Impedance The reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 O or 75 0 75 Q should be selected if the 50 O input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 7 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 117 This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For analog baseband input an impedance of 50 O is always used Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 188 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Data Input and Output Settings Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the
351. p S FSW provided it has the correct format Furthermore the captured UO data from the UO Analyzer can be expor ted for further analysis in external applications For details see chapter 5 5 I Q Data Import and Export on page 62 e Default Settings for UO Analyzer measuremente 72 E e TE e cuoc ener e rite ce etr trio te tete bete etes 73 e MOONEN ee 75 e Data Input and Output Settings nennen 76 LEE ette 116 e REENEN deret eni e nd e te ce rn ec Pn ae ine 125 LEM Trigger ruler 126 e Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Gettngs A 134 Display Comiquera 142 e Adjusting Settings Automatically esencia nas 142 e Configuring an UO Analyzer as an MSRA MSRT Application 145 6 1 Default Settings for UO Analyzer measurements When you switch an UO Analyzer measurement channel the first time a set of parame ters is passed on from the currently active application 6 2 CR EI Ee Overview Configuration Overview e center frequency and frequency offset e reference level and reference level offset e attenuation e signal source e input coupling e YIG filter state After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily Apart from these settings the following default settings
352. page 246 Note If you use the default settings with TRACe 10 DATA the following minimum buffer sizes for the response data are recommended ASCII format 10 kBytes 4 Binary format 2 kBytes Parameters NORM This value is always NORM 0 This value is always 0 lt SampleRate gt Sample rate for the data acquisition Range 100 Hz to 10 GHz continuously adjustable RST 32000000 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements lt TriggerMode gt Selection of the trigger source used for the measurement IMMediate EXTernal EXT2 EXT3 IFPower For IMM mode gating is automatically deactivated RST IMM lt TriggerSlope gt Used trigger slope POSitive NEGative RST POS lt PretriggerSamp gt Defines the trigger offset in terms of pretrigger samples Nega tive values correspond to a trigger delay This value also defines the interval between the trigger signal and the gate edge in samples Range 461373339 to 461373339 RST 0 lt NumberSamples gt Number of measurement values to record including the pretrig ger samples See Maximum record length for RF input on page 25 For digital input via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 the valid number of samples is described in chapter 5 2 3 Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Digital UO Data on page 33 RST 1001 Example TRAC IQ SET NORM 0 32MHz EXT POS 0 2048 Reads 2048 l Q values starting at the trigger point sample rate 32 MHz t
353. parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods Le using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board Starting the I Q Analyzer Application 2 Welcome to the l Q Analyzer Application The R amp S FSW UO Analyzer is a firmware application that adds functionality to perform UO data acquisition and analysis to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer features e Acquisition of analog UO data e Optionally acquisition of digital UO data via the Digital Baseband Interface option R amp S FSW B17 e Optionally acquisition of analog baseband data via the Analog Baseband Interface option R amp S FSW B71 e Import of stored UO data from other applications e Spectrum magnitude l Q vector and separate and Q component analysis of any UO data on the instrument e E
354. peak values i e maximum or minimum val ues in the measured signal Configuration settings allow you to influence the peak search results These settings are are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu or in the Search Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Then select the hori zontal Search Settings tab e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search Settings tab Markers Marker Settings Search Settings Peaksearch SearchLimits Next Peak Mode SEIN o Exclude LO ff On Right Limit ER 26 5 GHz Peak Excursion 6 0 dB Threshold mm 120 0 dBm Auto Max Peak Use Zoom Limits On On Auto Min Peak Search Limits Off Search Mode for Next Peak 156 Peak EXCHUI SION EE 157 Sesrcl IIIS iei E bare etes aede der e PE Ee Pee ER 157 L Search Limits Left Right tette tnnt 157 Mo 4b 0 UU 157 MMe Ti LIE cid 158 L Deactivating All Search Limite 158 Branch for ST nete teta innare anto aegre ee bx sages shape haa EE ERR R 158 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Marker Usage Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the righ
355. pecifies how the binary data is saved in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following e complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless e real Real number unitless e polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 4 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 342 The following data types are allowed e int8 8bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary UO data itself has no unit To get an l Q sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan nels Optional specifies the number of
356. ple an IQ Power trigger to start capturing data only when a specific power is exceeded Select the Display Config button and select up to six displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode Start a new sweep with the defined settings The captured data is written to the Digital Baseband Output connector continu ously How to Export and Import I Q Data UO data can only be exported in applications that process l Q data such as the l Q Analyzer or optional applications How to Export and Import UO Data Capturing and exporting UO data 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports UO data Configure the data acquisition Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement Select the El Save icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Export softkey In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name oN oO PF o Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension iq tar Importing UO data 1 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports UO data If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key Select the E Open icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Import softkey Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension o
357. quencer see the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command INITiate IMMediate on page 278 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate CONMeas on page 277 Display Configuration The captured signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evaluation methods available for the current application are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when you do one of the following e Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display Config button in the Overview e Select the Display Config softkey in the main application menu For a description of the available evaluation methods see chapter 4 Measurement and Result Displays on page 16 As of firmware version 1 60 up to 6 evaluations can be displayed in the UO Analyzer at any time including several graphical diagrams marker tables or peak lists The selected evaluation method not only affects the result display in a window but also the results of the trace data query in remote control see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 313 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW aut
358. quencies Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop are displayed in the External Generator gt Measurement Configuration for reference If the resulting frequency range exeeds the allowed ranges of the signal generator an error message is displayed see chapter 5 4 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 58 and the Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop values are corrected to comply with the range limits The calibration sweep nevertheless covers the entire span defined by the R amp S FSW however no input is received from the generator outside the generator s defined limits Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output TTL synchronization Some Rohde amp Schwarz signal generators support TTL synchronization when connec ted via GPIB The TTL interface is included in the AUX CONTROL connector of the R amp S FSW B10 option When pure GPIB connections are used between the R amp S FSW and the signal genera tor the R amp S FSW sets the generator frequency for each frequency point individually via GPIB and only when the setting procedure is finished the R amp S FSW can measure the next sweep point For generators with a TTL interface the R amp S FSW sends a list of the frequencies to be set to the generator before the beginning of the first sweep Then the R amp S FSW starts the sweep and the next frequency point is selected by both the R amp S FSW and the gen erator using the TTL handshake line T
359. r application a specific frequency bandwidth is swept for a specified measurement time During this time a defined number of samples Record Length are captured These samples are then evaluated by the applications Therefore in this case the number of sweep points does not define the amount of data to be acquired but rather the number of trace points that are evaluated and displayed in the result dia grams Note As opposed to previous versions of the UO Analyzer the sweep settings are now window specific For some result displays the sweep points may not be editable as they are determined automatically or restrictions may apply For the 1 Q vector result display the number of UO samples to record Record Length must be identical to the number of trace points to be displayed Sweep Points Thus the sweep points are not editable for this result display If the Record Length is edited the sweep points are adapted automatically For record lengths out side the valid range of sweep points i e less than 101 points or more than 32001 points the diagram does not show valid results Using fewer than 4096 sweep points with a detector other than Auto Peak may lead to wrong level results For details see Combining results trace detector on page 65 Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 281 User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 140 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration Sweep Average Count Defines
360. r application this command returns the magnitude of the and Q values I jQ for each sweep point 1001 values For the Real Imag I Q result display the command returns first the real parts for each trace point then the imaginary parts l 004 OD Don For the I Q Vector result display the and Q values for each trace point are returned 1001 pairs of and Q values For analog baseband input in real baseband processing mode I or Q only only the positive spectrum is returned The values for the missing component in the Real Imag I Q and the UO vector result displays are all 0 Example TRAC TRACE3 Queries the data of trace 3 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Magnitude on page 16 See Spectrum on page 17 See Q Vector on page 17 See Real Imag 1 Q on page 18 TRACe lt n gt DATA MEMory lt Trace gt lt OffsSwPoint gt lt NoOfSwPoints gt This command queries the previously captured trace data for the specified trace from the memory As an offset and number of sweep points to be retrieved can be specified the trace data can be retrieved in smaller portions making the command faster than the TRAC DATA command This is useful if only specific parts of the trace data are of interest If no parameters are specified with the command the entire trace data is retrieved in this case the command is identical to TRAC DATA TRACE1 Query parameters lt Trace gt TRACE1 TRACE2 T
361. r of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key on the front panel restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel For details see chapter 6 1 Default Settings for UO Analyzer measurements on page 72 Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 184 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool bar Some functions for particular data types are also available via softkeys or dialog boxes in the corresponding menus e g trace data or marker peak lists O For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual 6 4 Data Input and Output Settings
362. r parameters For more information see chapter 5 6 Basics on FFT on page 63 Auto mode Default The RBW is determined automatically depending on the Sample Rate and Record Length Manual mode The RBW can be defined by the user The user defined RBW is used and the Window Length and possibly Sample Rate are adapted accordingly Advanced This mode is used if the Advanced Fourier Transformation Params FFT mode option is enabled The RBW is determined by the advanced FFT parameters Remote command SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth MODE on page 258 SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 258 Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Shows or hides the Advanced Fourier Transformation parameters in the Data Acqui sition dialog box These parameters are only available and required for the advanced FFT mode For more information see chapter 5 6 Basics on FFT on page 63 Transformation Algorithm Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Defines the FFT calculation method Single One FFT is calculated for the entire record length if the FFT Length is larger than the record length zeros are appended to the captured data Averaging Several overlapping FFTs are calculated for each record the results are combined to determine the final FFT result for the record The number of FFTs to be averaged is determined by the Window Over lap and the Window Overlap Remote command SENSe IQ FFT ALGo
363. rameters lt Time gt refer to data sheet RST depends on current settings determined automati cally Example SWE TIME 10s Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Meas Time on page 137 SYSTem SEQuencer lt State gt This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual IO Analysis Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF 10 7 UO Analysis 10 7 1 General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers etc can be configured using the following commands They are identical to the analysis functions in the Spec trum application except for the special marker functions Gohfiguring Sada WR 282 e Using Markere coin dii e dee e ER XE ec ASSEN 287 e ZOOMING INTO the DISPO 302 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and L
364. ration See Omitting the Digital Decimation Filter No Filter on page 136 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements TRACe IQ RLENgth lt NoOfSamples gt This command sets the record length for the acquired UO data Increasing the record length also increases the measurement time Note Alternatively you can define the measurement time using the SENS SWE TIME command Parameters lt NoOfSamples gt Number of samples to record See Maximum record length for RF input on page 25 For digital input via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 the valid number of samples is described in chapter 5 2 3 Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Digital UO Data on page 33 RST 1001 Example TRAC IQ RLEN 256 Manual operation See Record Length on page 137 TRACe IQ SET NORM 0 lt SampleRate gt lt TriggerMode gt lt TriggerSlope gt lt PretriggerSamp gt lt NumberSamples gt This command sets up the R amp S FSW for UO measurements If you do not use this command to set up UO measurements the R amp S FSW will use its current settings for UO measurements If the 1 Q Analyzer has not been turned on previously the command also switches to the UO Analyzer For more information on triggering measurements see chapter 6 7 Trigger Settings on page 126 You can set the trigger level with TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower For details on trigger parameters see chapter 10 4 4 Triggering on
365. rator repeteret p iones 53 RF input ce RF input remote A 186 Overloading External JEnerator serpit Eeer gudde 59 Overview A ceases 73 OVLD External generator sius neronen nnd EErEE nea 53 P Parameters Input signal Output Peak excursion Peak list GOMMQUIING sanior iaa rennes 159 Displaying vn 159 Evaluation method rrt riens 19 Exporting 161 Marker numbers 21 161 Maximum number of peaks ssssssssss 160 Peak excCUFSIOD 1 certare Acker treat 157 160 Remote CONMO aiit eere ioci e Her ite ders 299 Sort mode ss ICI P Peak search Deactivating limite aiii 158 KEY inanam anas seg A HA 157 ise C 156 Retrieving results remote 915 Threshold eos su 157 Poterie 158 Peaks Marker positiohilig irr rent nnns 159 NX E 159 GE 159 Performance PET parameters iia tree ens 67 Performing UO Analyzer measurement sesseess 164 Ports External Mixer B21 remote control 206 POWOF SOISOIS oiii teca area 76 Activating Deactivating 106 ee Le EE 103 Average COUN E sai vies code it 108 Configuration softkey 1 105 Configuring 104 Configuring as trigger 47114 Connecting cceestssays 104 Continuous Value Update 106 baee ss 108
366. re combined the FFT length is 4096 A Flatop window function is used Advanced FFT mode The RBW is determined by the advanced FFT parameters depending on the selected FFT Calculation Methods method FFT Calculation Methods FFT calculation can be performed using different methods Single In single mode one FFT is calculated for the entire record length that means the win dow length is identical to the record length If the defined FFT Length is larger than the record length zeros are appended to the captured data to reach the FFT length IO Analyzer in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode Fig 5 20 FFT parameters for single FFT calculation Averaging In averaging mode several overlapping FFTs are calculated for each record the results are combined to determine the final FFT result for the record The number of FFTs to be combined is determined by the Window Overlap and the Window Overlap Fig 5 21 FFT parameters for averaged FFT calculation 5 7 UO Analyzer in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode The I Q Analyzer can also be used in MSRA and MSRT operating mode The MSRA Master channel is implemented as an I Q Analyzer application Only this channel cap tures data in MSRA mode Thus the functions and settings described for data acquisi tion in the 1 Q Analyzer application also apply to the MSRA Master Furthermore the UO Analyzer can be used to analyze data in MSRA mode Thus the result displays and analysis functions provided
367. re listed then the Q values 1 1 1 1 1 1 Q Q Q Q Q Q IQPair One pair of UO values after the other is listed 1 Q 1 Q 1 Q RST IQBL Retrieving Results TRACe IQ DATA MEMory lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfSamples gt This command queries the UO data currently stored in the memory of the R amp S FSW By default the command returns all UO data in the memory You can however narrow down the amount of data that the command returns using the optional parameters By default the amount of available data depends on TRACe 10 SET Parameters lt OffsetSamples gt Selects an offset at which the output of data should start in rela tion to the first data If omitted all captured samples are output starting with the first sample Range 0 to lt of samples 1 with lt of samples being the maximum number of captured values RST 0 lt NoOfSamples gt Number of samples you want to query beginning at the offset you have defined If omitted all captured samples starting at offset are output Range 1 to lt of samples gt lt offset samples gt with lt of samples gt maximum number of captured values RST lt of samples gt Return values lt lQData gt Measured value pair 1 Q for each sample that has been recor ded The data format depends on FORMat DATA Default unit V 10 8 2 Retrieving Results Example TRAC IQ STAT ON Enables acquisition of UO data TRAC IQ SET NORM 10MHz 3
368. red data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applica tions H User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 304 IO Analysis For the I Q Analyzer application the commands to define tha analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 10 4 5 Config uring Data Acquisition on page 257 Be sure to select the correct measurement chan nel before executing these commands Useful commands for configuring the analysis interval described elsewhere e TRACe IQ SRATe on page 263 e TRACe IQ BWIDth on page 261 e TRACe IQ RLENgth on page 262 e SENSe SWEep TIME on page 281 Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels e DEE TE le 305 GALCulate MSRACALINSEVAbLue ic ine ariete na rrr olaaa 305 CAL CulateMSbRAWiNDow cnz NAU 306 INTI REPRESA A A A AA da e Taken 306 SENSS IMSRASCAP Tur OFF Olinda 306 CALCulate MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Manual oper
369. rigger External slope Positive TRAC TO SET NORM 0 4 MHz EXT POS 1024 512 Reads 512 I Q values from 1024 measurement points before the trigger point filter type NORMAL sample rate 4 MHz trigger External slope Positive Manual operation See Record Length on page 137 TRACe lQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command sets the final user sample rate for the acquired UO data Thus the user sample rate can be modified without affecting the actual data capturing settings on the R amp S FSW Note The smaller the user sample rate the smaller the usable UO bandwidth see chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 24 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt SampleRate gt The valid sample rates are described in chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 24 Range 100 Hz to 10 GHz continuously adjustable RST 32 MHz Manual operation See Sample Rate on page 135 TRACe lQ TPISample This command queries the time offset between the sample start and the trigger event trigger point in sample TPIS Since the R amp S FSW usually samples with a much higher sample rate than the specific application actually requires the trigger point determined internally is much more precise than the one determined from the down sampled data in the application Thus the TPIS indicates the offset between the sam ple start and the
370. rithm on page 259 FFT Length Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Defines the number of frequency points determined by each FFT calculation The more points are used the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes but the longer the calculation takes In advanced FFT mode the number of sweep points is set to the FFT length automati cally Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings Note If you use the arrow keys or the rotary knob to change the FFT length the value is incremented or decremented by powers of 2 If you enter the value manually any integer value from 3 to 524288 is available Remote command SENSe 10 FFT LENGth on page 259 Window Function Advanced FFT mode Basic settings In the I Q analyzer you can select one of several FFT window types The following window types are available Blackman Harris Flattop Gauss Rectangular 5 Term Remote command SENSe IQ FFT WINDow TYPE on page 260 Window Overlap Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Defines the part of a single FFT window that is re calculated by the next FFT calcula tion when using multiple FFT windows Remote command SENSe IQ FFT WINDow OVER1ap on page 260 Window Length Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Defines the number of samples to be included in a single FFT window in averaging mode In single mode the window length corresponds to the Record Length on page 137 Values from 3 to 4096 are available in
371. rocessed by the I Q Analyzer can also be output to this interface Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 5 2 1 0 The digital input and output cannot be used simultaneously Since the Digital UO input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path both cannot be used simultaneously When one is activated established connec tions for the other are disconnected When the second input is deactivated connec tions to the first are re established This may cause a short delay in data transfer after Switching the input source Lagen 31 E ee lr LEE 32 e Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Digital UO Data 33 e Interface Status Information de certet dre eite da ae t dr d 36 Digital Input Digital UO data can be used as an alternative data input source for measurements with the R amp S FSW Connecting the digital input instrument The instrument that provides digital input must be connected to the R amp S Digital Base band Interface at the rear of the R amp S FSW Information on the detected input instru ment is shown in the Digital UO Input Source configuration dialog You can configure the basic connection settings e g the input sample rate It is recommended that you use the R amp S9SMU Z6 1415 0201 02 cable to connect other devices to the Digital Baseband Interface of the R amp S FSW Processing digital input The digital UO data stream is fed into the analyz
372. rrr tti tnmen edens 24 Relationship to sample rate sssessssss 25 e E 134 Baseband Input elt Lee 37 BB Power Trigger softkey metes 129 Bias Conversion loss table B21 ssss External Mixer B21 remote control External Mixer B21 eerte ters Branch for peak search VQ Analyzer uia censis rc enitn 158 C Calibration Analog Baseband Interface ssssssssss 40 External generator nme e rien External generator remote 2 Normalization external generator 101 Reference trace external generator 53 Reflection open measurement external generator 101 Reflection short measurement external generator 101 Restoring settings external generator 54 101 Storing results external generator 53 Transmission measurement external generator 101 Capture offset MSRA application rr rris 139 MSRT applications tret ee 139 TE ale 306 308 SU anos 139 Capture time see also Measurement time sesssse 281 Capturing 1 Q data see Data acquisition 276 Center Mkr Freq kc Center MEQUENCY meissos ts Analog Baseband B71 neis Automatic configuration Displayed erret rrt rere tns Setting to MAKES iii Softkey us
373. rsion loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL DATA on page 208 Insert Value Inserts a new position value entry in the table If the table is empty a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted If entries already exist a new entry is inserted above the selected entry The position of the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half Delete Value Deletes the currently selected position value entry Shift x Shifts all positions in the table by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x axis Shift y Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the y axis Save The conversion loss table is stored under the specified name in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory of the instrument Data Input and Output Settings 6 4 1 4 Digital UO Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the Digital Base band Interface R amp S FSW B17 in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT
374. rz devices TTL GPIB connection with TTL synchronization if available for most Rohde amp Schwarz devices RST GPIB Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN LINK TTL Selects GPIB TTL interface for generator operation Manual operation See TTL Handshake on page 97 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE Type This command selects the type of external generator For a list of the available generator types see the External Generator Control Basics section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters Name Generator name as string value RST SMUO2 Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN2 TYPE SMEO2 Selects SME02 as generator 2 Manual operation See Generator Type on page 96 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess Address Configures the TCP IP address for the external generator Parameters Address TCP IP address between 0 0 0 0 and 0 255 255 255 RST 0 0 0 0 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Example SYST COMM TCP RDEV GEN ADDR 130 094 122 195 Manual operation See GPIB Address TCP IP Address on page 97 Source Calibration The following commands are required to activate the calibration functions of the exter nal tracking generator However they are only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 218 Remote commands exclusive to source calibration DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe R
375. s TRACe IQ APCon B lt ConvFact gt Defines the conversion factor B for the calculation of the average power consumption For details see chapter 5 3 5 Average Power Consumption on page 43 Parameters lt ConvFact gt numeric value RST 0 0 TRACe IQ APCon RESult Queries the average power consumption for an analog baseband input This value is only calculated at the end of the UO data measurement if the TRACe 10 APCon STATe command is set to ON before the measurement is performed For details see chapter 5 3 5 Average Power Consumption on page 43 Parameters Average numeric value Default unit W Usage Query only Using External Mixers The commands required to work with external mixers in a remote environment are described here Note that these commands require the R amp S FSW B21 option to be installed and an external mixer to be connected to the front panel of the R amp S FSW In MSRA MSRT mode external mixers are not supported For details on working with external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual LEE EE Rs 199 Mor SEUS x nee o eerta AA Rede Rudd 201 e Conversion Loss Table Settings im cese iie us 206 e Programming Example Working with an External Mixer sees 210 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general usage of an external mixer SENSE MIKE STATS T en 200 SENSE HEISER ees giess ee EE ocas 200
376. s e Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types e Basics on I Q Data Acquisition Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the I Q Ana lyzer application as well as processing digital UO data in general e Configuration and Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to import capture and analyze UO data in the I Q Analyzer with or without optional interfaces with their corresponding remote control command e How to Work with UO Data The basic procedure to perform an UO Analyzer measurement or capture data via the R amp S Digital Baseband Interface with step by step instructions e Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup e Remote Commands to perform Measurements with UO Data Remote commands required to configure and perform UO Analyzer measurements or process digital IO data in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes e Annex Reference material e g UO file formats and a detailed description of the LVDS connector e List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual e Ind
377. s Configuration Defines how the conversion loss is handled The following methods are available Average Defines the average conversion loss for the entire range in dB Data Input and Output Settings Table Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list Pre defined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R amp S FSW Alternatively you can define your own conversion loss tables Imported tables are checked for compatibility with the current settings before being assigned Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Managing Conversion Loss Tables tab For details on conversion loss tables see the External Mixer descrip tion in the R amp S FSW User Manual For details on importing tables see Import Table on page 87 Remote command Average for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW on page 205 Table for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW on page 205 Average for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH on page 205 Table for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH on page 205 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general use of an external mixer They are only available if the External Mixer State is On Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Bias Settings Range 1 Signal ID Digital 1Q Bias Settings Range 2 Auto ID Dias Value MORO RISE 10 0 dB A
378. s demonstrate how to configure a power sensor to be used as an external power sensor trigger To configure a power sensor as an external power sensor PSE trigger 1 Connect a compatible power sensor to the Power Sensor interface on the front panel of the R amp S FSW For details on supported sensors see Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger on page 104 2 Setup the power sensor as described in How to Set Up a Power Sensor on page 109 3 In the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box select the External Power Trig ger option 4 Enter the power level at which a trigger signal is to be generated External Trigger Level and the other trigger settings for the power sensor trigger 5 Press the TRIG key on the front panel of the instrument and then select Trigger Gate Config 6 In the Trigger and Gate dialog box select Signal Source PSE The R amp S FSW is configured to trigger when the defined conditions for the power sensor occur Power measurement results are provided as usual 6 4 3 Output Settings The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters 0 Data Input and Output Settings How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or i
379. s the center frequency to the highest signal level in the current fre quency range Example ADJ FREO Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq on page 143 10 5 10 5 1 Configuring the Result Display SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 118 Configuring the Result Display The commands required to configure the screen display in a remote environment are described here e General Window Commands E 269 e Working with Windows in the Display 270 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application Note that the suffix lt n gt always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 184 pr u2elir e iaaii 269 DISPlay WINDOW D 270 DISPlay FORMat lt Format gt This command determines which tab is displayed
380. s used hardware options R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 used automatically for bandwidths gt 80 MHz in this case use the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector The sample rate is larger than 200 MHz upsampling IF WIDE OUTPUT If optional hardware R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 for bandwidth extension is instal led and activated i e for bandwidths 80 MHz the IF output is not sent to the IF User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 61 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing parece qe emen nme c pum _ __ VIDEO DEMOD output connector but rather to the additional IF WIDE OUTPUT con nector provided by the option In this case the IF output frequency cannot be defined manually but is determined automatically depending on the center frequency For details on the used frequencies see the data sheet The currently used output frequency is indicated in the field other wise used to define the frequency manually in the Output settings dialog box see IF Wide Out Frequency on page 113 IF 2 GHz OUTPUT For instrument models R amp S FSW43 50 67 the IF output can also be sent to the alter native IF 2 GHZ OUT output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz The IF output can then be analyzed by a different instrument for example an R amp SGRTO oscilloscope If output to the IF 2 GHZ OUT connector is activated the measured values are no longer sent to the display thus the trace data
381. sage Description Ext Generator Command Error Missing or wrong command in the generator setup file see chapter 5 4 4 3 Generator Setup Files on page 52 Ext Generator Visa Error Error with Visa driver provided with installation very unlikely Overloading At a reference level of 10 dBm and at a external generator output level of the same value the R amp S FSW operates without overrange reserve That means the R amp S FSW is in danger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than the reference line In this case either the message RF OVLD for overload or IF OVLD for exceeded display range clipping of the trace at the upper diagram border over range is displayed in the status line Overloading can be avoided as follows e Reducing the output level of the external generator Source Power on page 98 in External Generator gt Measurement Configuration e Increasing the reference level Reference Level in the Amplitude menu 5 4 5 Basics on Input from UO Data Files The I Q data to be evaluated in a particular R amp S FSW application can not only be cap tured by the application itself it can also be loaded from a file provided it has the cor rect format The file is then used as the input source for the application Currently this input source is only available in the R amp S FSW Pulse application For example you can capture UO data using the I Q Analyzer applicati
382. scription of remote commands required to perform measurements in the time and frequency domain see the R amp S FSW User Manual CAL Culate e ODE M 180 INSTr ment CREate DUPldcale 1 rrr er iaa cia 181 INSTrumentERESte NEW i cion ao ad 181 INS Er mentoREAISBREPLAGE ae iati re nido nani aa aida 181 INSTTOMENTDELSTE 000 A Aa 182 INS Tr mentLIS T2 E 182 INS Fratrem SENS ie irae eere ii edad io sk atoque e Bae agna Aa 2 Pei ende 183 TINS TRUER osi T 184 SYSTem PRESet CHANnsIEEXEQCuUte 1 arreter raa L otra huoc n oorr eaae y Eve da edd 184 ER de E M 184 O A E hie noi seituemnseteed 185 CALCulate IQ MODE lt EvalMode gt This command defines whether the captured UO data is evaluated directly or if it is converted via FFT to spectral or time data first It is currently only available for UO Analyzer applications in multistandrad mode not the MSRA Master Activating UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt EvalMode gt TDOMain Evaluation in time domain zero span FDOMain Evaluation in frequency domain IO Evaluation using UO data INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel e starts a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g Spectrum gt Spectrum 2 The ch
383. set to a fixed value Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 245 6 7 Trigger Settings Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the R amp S FSW hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is O Hz Note In MSRA MSRT mode this function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Mas ter Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 246 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger settings can be configured via the TRIG key or in the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you select the Trigger button in the Overview trigge Trigger Source Trig
384. sidered Remote command CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATe on page 293 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits LEFT on page 293 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits RIGHT on page 294 Search Threshold Search Limits Defines an absolute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search Only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected Remote command CALCulate THReshold on page 294 Marker Usage Using Zoom Limits Search Limits If activated the peak search is restricted to the active zoom area defined for a single zoom see Single Zoom on page 161 Remote command CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits ZOOM STATe on page 294 Deactivating All Search Limits Search Limits Deactivates the search range limits Remote command CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATe on page 293 CALCulate THReshold STATe on page 295 Branch for Peak Search Defines which data is used for marker search functions in UO data This function is only available for the display configuration Real Imag I Q see Real Imag 1 Q on page 18 Note The search settings apply to all markers not only the currently selected one Real Marker search functions are performed on the real trace of the UO measurement Imag Marker search functions are performed on the imaginary trace of the UO measurement Magnitude Marker search functions are performed on the magnitude of the and Q data Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer SEARch on page
385. sociated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Programming Examples Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range O to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable DIO register for IQ measurements Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Example STAT QUES DIQ Usage Query only 10 11 Programming Examples The following programming examples demonstrate how to capture UO data and per form UO data ana
386. sor is connected and configured Note For R amp S power sensors the Gate Mode Lv is not supported The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded rather than a time period However only time periods can be used for gating in level mode Thus the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement the measurement cannot be completed Remote command TRIG SOUR PSE see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 250 Time Trigger Source Trigger Source Triggers in a specified repetition interval Remote command TRIG SOUR TIME see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 250 Trigger Level Trigger Source Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt on page 249 For analog baseband B71 or digital baseband B17 input only Repetition Interval Trigger Source Defines the repetition interval for a time trigger The shortest interval is 2 ms The repetition interval should be set to the exact pulse period burst length frame length or other repetitive signal characteristic Remote command TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval on page 252 Drop Out Time Trigger Source Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Trigger Sett
387. ssary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 277 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position The unit is variable and depends on the one you have currently set In the Real Imag I Q result display of the UO Analyzer the command returns the real part first then the imaginary part 10 9 Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 In 1 Q Analyzer application for Real Imag 1 Q for example 1 852719887E 011 0 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 19 See Marker Peak List on page 19 MMEMory STORe LIST lt FileName gt This command exports the SEM and spurious emission list evaluation to a file The file format is dat Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as
388. switch to the vertical Marker tab The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap ter 10 7 2 1 Setting Up Individual Markers on page 287 e Individual Marker Sep eere a o 151 e General Marker Settings iier omne ti 154 Individual Marker Setup Up to 17 markers or delta markers can be activated for each window simultaneously Initial marker setup is performed using the Marker dialog box Marker Usage ER Markers Marker Settings Search Settings Ref Marker 7 13 e BS Si C Exa All Marker Off Selected State Stimulus Link to Marker Trace The markers are distributed among 3 tabs for a better overview By default the first marker is defined as a normal marker whereas all others are defined as delta markers with reference to the first marker All markers are assigned to trace 1 but only the first marker is active Selected BEE 152 WANK e 152 Marker Position G value acc 153 WET MERO m 153 Reference Markt cid aida 153 Linking to nei 153 Assigning the Marker to a Trace 153 Select Mark ovina oa iii 154 D icti a a A E E Ea A P 154 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 2
389. t P Impedance Mechanical Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State Mode Mode Value RF Aenal cui E EE E E AE EEA 119 L Attenuation Mode ValUC ccccseccscsessscecssescscsesesesesescecsesensesesescseecseseeceees 119 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B3p 119 jet eer up EE 120 L Preamplifier option BA emgeet 120 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that the Reference Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 117 Amplitude Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual for details Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on page 239 Shifting the Display Offset
390. t 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt NumberReadings gt An average count of 0 or 1 performs one power reading Range O to 256 Increment binary steps 1 2 4 8 Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging PMET2 MTIM AVER COUN 8 Sets the number of readings to 8 Manual operation See Average Count Number of Readings on page 108 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe lt State gt This command turns averaging for power sensor measurements on and off Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging Manual operation See Meas Time Average on page 107 SENSe PMETer lt p gt ROFFset STATe lt State gt This command includes or excludes the reference level offset of the analyzer for power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON 1 Includes the reference level offset in the results OFF 0 Ignores the reference level offset RST 1 Example PMET2 ROFF OFF Takes no offset into account for the measured power Manual operation See Use Ref Lev Offset on page 108 SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe State This command turns a power sensor on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF
391. t Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST 0dB Example SOUR POW OFFS 10dB Sets the level offset of the external generator to 20 dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Source Offset on page 98 Interface Configuration The following commands are required to configure the interface for the connection to the external generator SOURce EXTermal ROSCIllator SOU Roe corrente ia 219 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRSess eee 219 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface eee 219 Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK cnn anano nano 220 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE eese nennen nnn nnn 220 Gv Tem CGOMMunicate TChip R DEVice GENeratorADDbess rentrer errerreeo 220 SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce lt Source gt This command controls selection of the reference oscillator for the external generator If the external reference oscillator is selected the reference signal must be connected to the rear panel of the instrument Parameters Source INTernal the internal reference is used EXTernal the external reference is used if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar RST INT Example SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Switches to external reference oscillator Manual operation See Reference on page 97 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess Num
392. t of the current peak Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 298 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 296 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 298 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 296 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHt on page 298 E CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 296 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum LEFT on page 298 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 297 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 298 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 297 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on page 299 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 297 EN Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from O dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer PEXCursion on page 292 Search Limits The search results can be restricted by limiting the search area or adding search con ditions Search Limits Left Right Search Limits If activated limit lines are defined and displayed for the search Only results within the limited search range are con
393. t on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instru ment function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html gt Downloads gt Firmware Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other
394. tc can be config ured via the Analysis button in the Overview They are identical to the analysis func tions in the Spectrum application except for the special marker functions which are not available for UO data For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 7 Analysis on page 147 Analysis functions exclusive to UO data e Tato SUIS still bilbao 147 E ET E 151 e ZOOM FUNCION Suri at iii 161 e Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode 162 7 1 Trace Settings You can configure the settings for up to 6 individual traces Trace settings can be configured via the TRACE key in the Traces dialog box or in the vertical Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box For UO Vector evaluation mode only 1 trace is available and the detector is not edita ble R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Analysis Traces Trace Export Copy Trace Trace Math Spectrogram Detector Mode Auto Type Hold Trace 1 Clear Write L DE La Werer Trace 2 Blank M mn Rms L Logarithmic Trace 3 MBlank L DE mm Power Trace 4 Blank La DE L Sa ES PB 2 SE T Quick Config Preset All Traces Set Trace Mode Set Trace Mode Max Avg Min Max Clrwrite Min ice E 150
395. ted if the 50 O input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 The command is not available for measurements with the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 78 See Unit on page 118 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed only RF input is supported Tip The I Q data to be analyzed for UO Analyzer can not only be measured by the WLAN application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the analyzed UO data from the WLAN application can be exported for further analysis in external applications See chapter 6 3 Import Export Functions on page 75 10 4 1 2 Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt Source gt RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ data only available with optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For details on UO input see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual AIQ Analog Baseband signal only available with optional Analog Baseband I
396. terface R amp S FSW B17 on and off Using the digital input and digital output simultaneously is not possible If digital baseband output is active the sample rate is restricted to 100 MHz 200 MHz if enhanced mode is possible max 160 MHz bandwidth See also Digital UO enhanced mode on page 34 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP DIQ ON Manual operation Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements See Digital Baseband Output on page 115 OUTPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital UO data output to the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Return values lt ConnState gt lt DeviceName gt lt SerialNumber gt lt PortName gt lt NotUsed gt lt MaxTransferRate gt lt ConnProtState gt lt PRBSTestState gt lt NotUsed gt lt Placeholder gt Example Manual operation Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected Device ID of the connected device Serial number of the connected device Port name used by the connected device to be ignored Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done to be ignored
397. ternal mixer band starts Example MIX FREQ STAR Queries the start frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 82 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops Example MIX FREQ STOP Queries the stop frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 82 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard wave guide band Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Note Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function Use this command to restore the predefined band ranges Example MIX HARM BAND PRES Presets the selected waveguide band Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Band on page 82 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue Band This command selects the external mixer band The query returns the currently selected band This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 200 Parameters lt Band gt KA JQ U V E W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Manual operation See Band on page 82 Table 10 2 Frequency ranges for pre defined bands Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz KA A 26 5 40 0 Q 33 0 50 0 U
398. th Unit Auto Scale Once TE Amplitude RAMO TEE 124 Ref tevel POSIUOD A o a e e n 124 Sce M 124 BEP EE 124 Range Defines the displayed y axis range in dB The default value is 100 dB Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe on page 242 Ref Level Position Defines the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis in where 0 96 corresponds to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 243 Scaling Defines the scaling method for the y axis Logarithmic Logarithmic scaling only available for logarithmic units dB and A V Watt Linear Unit Linear scaling in the unit of the measured signal Linear Per Linear scaling in percentages from 0 to 100 cent Absolute The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the refer ence level not available for Linear Percent Relative The scaling is in dB relative to the reference level only available for logarithmic units dB The upper line of the grid reference level is always at 0 dB Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SPACing on page 243 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MODE on page 243 Y Axis Max Defines the maximum value of the y axis in the currently selected diagram in either direction in Volts
399. the Record Length is edited the sweep points are adapted automatically For record lengths outside the valid range of sweep points i e less than 101 points or more than 100001 points the diagram does not show valid results Remote command TRACe IQ RLENgth on page 262 TRACe IQ SET on page 262 Swap UO Activates or deactivates the inverted UO modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it On and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 260 RBW Defines the resolution bandwidth The available RBW values depend on the sample rate and record length See chapter 5 6 4 Frequency Resolution of FFT Results RBW on page 67 Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings Depending on the selected RBW mode the value is either determined automatically or can be defined manually As soon as you enter a value in the input field the RBW mode is changed to Manual If the Advanced Fourier Transformation Params option is enabled advanced FFT mode is selected and the RBW cannot be defined directly Note that the RBW is correlated with the Sample Rate and Record Length and possi bly the Window Function and Window Length Changing any one of these parameters may cause a change to one or more of the othe
400. the Reference Value field c Optionally select the Use Ref Level Offset option to take the reference level offset set for the analyzer into account for the measured power To use the power sensor as an external power trigger select the External Power Trigger option and define the trigger settings For details see How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External PSE Trigger on page 111 If necessary repeat steps 3 10 for another power sensor Set the Power Sensor State at the top of the Power Sensor tab to On to acti vate power measurement for the selected power sensors The results of the power measurement are displayed in the marker table Function Sensor lt 1 4 gt Data Input and Output Settings How to Zero the Power Sensor 1 To display the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box do one of the following e Select Input from the Overview e Select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then the Power Sensor Config softkey 2 Select the tab that is assigned to the power sensor you want to zero 3 Press the Zeroing Power Sensor button A dialog box is displayed that prompts you to disconnect all signals from the input of the power sensor 4 Disconnect all signals sending input to the power sensor and press ENTER to con tinue 5 Wait until zeroing is complete A corresponding message is displayed How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External PSE Trigger The following step by step instruction
401. the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as int16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 219 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt lt PowerVs T lt Min gt lt Arra lt fl lt fl Pime gt yOfFloat length 256 gt oat gt 134 lt float gt oat gt 142 lt float gt lt El oat gt 140 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 71 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 133 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt AA 2 UO Data File Format iq tar float 111 float ArrayOfFloat Min Max ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt
402. the display This setting is most suitable to move the marker over a larger distance Sweep The marker position is moved from one sweep point to the next This Points setting is required for a very precise positioning if more sweep points are collected than the number of pixels that can be displayed on the screen It is the default mode Remote command CALCulate MARKer X SSIZe on page 291 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily or to use the current marker position to define another characteristic value In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings Most marker positioning functions and the search settings are available in the MKR menu 7 2 2 1 Marker Usage Search settings are also available via the MARKER key or in the vertical Marker Con fig tab of the Analysis dialog box horizontal Search Settings tab In UO Analyzer mode the search settings for Real Imag I Q evaluation include an additional parameter see Branch for Peak Search on page 158 The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap ter 10 7 2 4 Positioning the Marker on page 295 e Marker Search Getttngs nnne nnne 156 e Positiohilid H tee CN 158 Marker Search Settings Markers are commonly used to determine
403. the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values O or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams Ifthe trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also deter mines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 280 SENSe AVERage COUNt on page 286 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Ifthe Sequencer is active in MSRT mode the Continuous Sweep function does not start data capturing it merely has an effect on trace averaging over multiple sequen ces In this case trace averag
404. ther than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated For gated measurements this setting also defines the gating source Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 250 Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 250 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector on the front or rear panel meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 131 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel In the I Q Analyzer application only External Trigger 1 is supported For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector on the front panel External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 113 External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connect
405. ticular note the irregularity mentioned in chapter 5 1 1 2 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated UO Bandwidth Extension Option B500 on page 29 This rate may differ from the sample rate of the connected device see Input Sample Rate on page 91 If the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active restrictions to the sample rate apply see chapter 5 2 3 Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Digital UO Data on page 33 Remote command TRACe IQ SRATe on page 263 Analysis Bandwidth Defines the flat usable bandwidth of the final I Q data This value is dependent on the defined Sample Rate and the defined signal source Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings Up to the Maximum Bandwidth the following rule applies analysis bandwidth 0 8 sample rate Note For input from the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 If the fre quency range defined by the analysis bandwidth and the center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz for low IF evaluation or the maximum frequency for I jQ evaluation an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency see Center Frequency on page 94 or the analysis bandwidth to exclude possible unwanted signal components For details on frequency ranges and the analysis bandwidth see chapter 5 3 Process ing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface on page 37 Remote command TRACe IQ BWIDth on page 261 Maximum Bandwidth Defines the maximum band
406. tion See Select Q Data File on page 80 10 4 1 3 Configuring Digital UO Input and Output Useful commands for digital UO data described elsewhere INP SEL DIQ see INPut SELect on page 188 e TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 248 e TRACe IQ DIQFilter on page 261 Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual O Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde8Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Remote commands exclusive to digital UO data input and output INPUU DIQIC DEViCG c 190 INPUEDIO RANGE CUPPE AUTO iii 192 INPuCDIORANGe COUlblmg nana nn nn nn nn cnn cn cnn anna 192 INPUEDIO RANGOTUPP EE 192 INPUtDIO RANGe UPPE UN IT cocida a 192 INP t aile vec Pm 193 INPUEDIO SRA TS AU TO EE 193 TT le a A AA o A 193 UTP 1D er ei 194 INPut DIQ CDEVice This com
407. tion on page 102 See Ref Level Position on page 124 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis 10 4 3 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit PERCent Linear scaling in RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in 96 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Scaling on page 124 Frequency CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CENTer esses nnne nena 244 SENSeJFREQOUEDCY GENTGE EE 244 ISENSeTFREOQusrncy GEN Ter STEP arenorna aaan a aaa a aaia TEANA 245 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO co nonnn coronan coco ettet 245 ISENSe 31FREQUEnCy OFF SEU ia ia 246 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer This command matches the center frequency to the frequency of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC CENT Sets the center frequency to the frequency of marker 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Center Frequency Marker Frequency on page 159 SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt
408. tion to configure the signal capture e Sample rate selected for analysis data or Analysis Bandwidth the band width range in which the signal remains unchanged by the digital decimation fil ter and thus remains undistorted this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW both values are correlated e Measurement Time how long the signal is to be captured e Record Length the number of samples to be captured also defined by sam ple rate and measurement time 9 Select the Display Config button and select up to six displays that are of interest to you To analyze the complex spectrum of the analog baseband signal for instance select the Spectrum result display and the UO mode I jQ in the input settings The displayed span corresponds to the selected sample rate Arrange the windows on the display to suit your preferences 10 Exit the SmartGrid mode 11 Start a new sweep with the defined settings User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 168 How to Capture or Output UO Data via Optional Interfaces 8 2 3 How to Capture Data from the Optional Baseband Input Connectors R amp S FSW B71 as RF Input RF signals can also be input via the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband Interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed Thus RF signals can also be input using an active R amp S probe The probe input can then be processed as common RF input 1 Connect the device for example a probe
409. tional information is displayed in the channel bar Label Description EXT TG lt source power gt External generator active signal sent with lt source power gt level LVL Power Offset see Source Offset on page 98 FRQ Frequency Offset see Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denomi nator Offset on page 99 NOR Normalization on No difference between reference setting and measurement APX approximation Normalization on Deviation from the reference setting occurs Aborted normalization or no calibration performed yet Error and status messages The following status and error messages may occur during external generator control Message Description Ext Generator GPIB Handshake Error Connection to the generator is not possible e g due to a Ext Generator TCPIP Handshake Error cable damage or loose connection or wrong address Ext Generator TTL Handshake Error Ext Generator Limits Exceeded The allowed frequency or power ranges for the generator were exceeded Reverse Sweep via min Ext Generator Fre Reverse sweep is performed frequencies are reduced to quency the minimum frequency then increased again see Reverse sweep on page 57 Ext Generator File Syntax Error Syntax error in the generator setup file see chap ter 5 4 4 3 Generator Setup Files on page 52 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Mes
410. tive probes e Capturing analog UO data from the optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 and redirecting it to the RF input path e Importing UO data from a file Background information for all these scenarios and more is provided in the following sections e Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input 21 e Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 30 e Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface ssesssss 37 e Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output 44 e VO Data Importand EXPO iii dio A oie 62 e adf PR 63 e UO Analyzer in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode esee 69 e Measurements in the Time and Frequency Domain 70 Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input Complex baseband data In the telephone systems of the past baseband data was transmitted unchanged as an analog signal In modern phone systems and in radio communication however the baseband data is modulated on a carrier frequency which is then transmitted and must be demodulated by the receiver When using modern modulation methods e g QPSK QAM etc the baseband signal becomes complex Complex data or Q data con sists of an imaginary I and a real Q component Sweep vs sampling While the standard Spectrum application on the R amp S FSW performs frequency sweeps on the input signal and measurements in the frequency and time domain other appli
411. to the next free power sensor index for which Auto Assignment is selected Alternatively you can assign the sensors manually by deactivating the Auto option and selecting a serial number from the list Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe on page 232 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine on page 226 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt CONFigure AUTO STATe on page 225 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt on page 226 Zeroing Power Sensor Starts zeroing of the power sensor For details on the zeroing process refer to the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command CALibration PMETer lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE on page 227 Data Input and Output Settings Frequency Manual Defines the frequency of the signal to be measured The power sensor has a memory with frequency dependent correction factors This allows extreme accuracy for signals of a known frequency Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency on page 230 Frequency Coupling Selects the coupling option The frequency can be coupled automatically to the center frequency of the instrument or to the frequency of marker 1 Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency LINK on page 230 Unit Scale Selects the unit with which the measured power is to be displayed Available units are dBm dB W and If dB or is selected the display is relative to the reference value that is defined with either th
412. tput frequency of the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector cannot be defined manually but is determined automatically depending on the center frequency It is indi cated in this field when the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used For details on the used frequencies see the data sheet The IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used automatically instead of the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector if the bandwidth extension hardware option R amp S FSW B160 U160 is activated i e for bandwidths gt 80 MHz If the IF 2 GHZ OUT output connector is used the measured IF value is sent at a fixed frequency of 2 GHz For more information see chapter 5 4 8 IF and Video Signal Output on page 61 Remote command OUTPut IF IFFRequency on page 237 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT For details see chapter 5 4 6 Input from Noise Sources on page 60 Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 236 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual
413. trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 114 Configuring UO Gating Usually in spectrum analysis measurements are based on a certain length of time called the gate area With UO gating you can define the gate area using the gate length the distance between the capture periods and the number of periods The gate length and the distance between the capture periods are specified in samples UO gating is only available using remote commands manual configuration is not possi ble Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Using UO gating the gate area can be defined using the following methods e Edge triggered capturing After a trigger signal the gate period is defined by a gate length and a gate dis tance All data in the gate period is captured until the required number of samples has been captured Number of gate periods Gate delay Gate period Gate distance e Level triggered capturing After a trigger signal all data is captured in which the gate signal is set to 1 which means it has exceeded a level In this case the gate signal can be generated by the IFP trigger for example each time the IFP level is exceeded the IFP trigger signal is set to 1 and the samples in this area are captured as gate samples 2 ou 100 HS AR The number of complex samples to be captured prior to the trigger event can be selected
414. ts with the I Q analyzer Parameters Number Range 1 to 1023 RST 1 Example TRAC IQ EGAT NOF 2 TRACe IQ EGATe TYPE Type This command selects the gate mode for gated measurements with the UO analyzer Note The IF power trigger holdoff time is ignored if you are using the Level gate mode in combination with an IF Power trigger 10 4 5 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt Type gt LEVel EDGE RST EDGE Example TRAC 1Q EGAT TYPE LEV Configuring Data Acquisition The following commands are required to capture data in the I Q Analyzer MSRA MSRT operating mode Note that in MSRA MSRT operating mode configuring data acquisition is only possible for the MSRA MSRT Master channel In UO Analyzer application channels these com mands define the analysis interval Be sure to select the correct measurement chan nel before using these commands For more commands related to the MSRA operating mode see chapter 10 7 4 Config uring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only on page 304 For more commands related to the MSRT operating mode see chapter 10 7 5 Config uring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only on page 307 Useful commands for I Q data acquisition described elsewhere e SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 280 e SENSe SWEep POINts on page 281 e SENSe SWEep TIME on page 281 Remote commands exclusive to I Q data acquisition SE le Te
415. tus registers of the R amp S FSW The following status registers of the R amp S FSW status reporting system are used by the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 The commands required to query the sta tus registers specific to the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 are described with the registers For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual D RST does not influence the status registers DIQ ACPLimit SYNC LMARGin LIMit CALibration UNCAL Querying the Status Registers Digital UO Output Connection protocol error Digital UO Output Connection protocol in progress Digital UO Output Device connected UO data acquisition error Digital UO Input FIFO Overload FREQuency Digital 1 Q Input Connection Protocol error TEMPerature Digital 1 Q Input Connection Protocol in progress POWer Digital UO Input Device connected TIME EXTended STATus QUEStionable DIQ STATus QUEStionable STATus QUEStionable SYNC 10 10 1 Fig 10 2 Status registers used by the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 e STATus QUEStionable SYNC Reglister 2 icem mismas 320 e STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register enne tene 322 STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register This register contains information about the state of the UO data acquisition This regis ter is used with option Digital Baseband Interface R
416. ual Remote command MMEMory STORe 1Q STATe on page 318 MMEMor y STORe 1Q COMMent on page 318 Data Input and Output Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output Such as noise or trigger signals For background information on providing input and output or working with power sen sors see the R amp S FSW User Manual gt To display this dialog box do one of the following 6 4 1 6 4 1 1 Data Input and Output Settings e Select the Input button in the Overview e Select the INPUT OUTPUT key e input Source Settings erret id t Rec du Brei da 77 A EE 103 e Tele EE 111 e Digital VQ CUIPUESSTINOS TT 115 Input Source Settings The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW will analyze Input settings can be configured in the Input dialog box Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box Since the Digital UO input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path both cannot be used simultaneously When one is activated established connec tions for the other are disconnected When the second input is deactivated connec tions to the first are re established This may cause a short delay in data transfer after Switching the input source External mixers are not supported in MSRA MSRT mode e Radio Frequency IT EE 77 e Settings for Input trom VQ Data FI Gs
417. uired in order to transfer data with up to 200 Msps For details on installation and operation of the R amp S DiglConf software see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Man ual 4 Measurement and Result Displays The UO Analyzer can capture I Q data The I Q data that was captured by or imported to the R amp S FSW can then be evaluated in various different result displays Select the result displays using the SmartGrid functions As of firmware version 1 60 up to 6 evaluations can be displayed in the UO Analyzer at any time including several graphical diagrams marker tables or peak lists For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Measurements in the time and frequency domain The I Q Analyzer application not Master in MSRA mode can also perform measure ments on the captured UO data in the time and frequency domain see also chap ter 5 7 I Q Analyzer in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode on page 69 They are con figured using the same settings and provide similar results In addition the analysis interval used for the measurement is indicated as in all multistandard applications The time and frequency domain measurements and the available results are described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Result displays for UO data MEAG NU Si SO O 16 pre Edi A perce AA A AAA A AAA AA 17 HA
418. upling Defines the frequency coupling mode between the R amp S FSW and the generator For more information on coupling frequencies see chapter 5 4 4 7 Coupling the Fre quencies on page 55 Auto Default setting a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW see Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denomi nator Offset on page 99 the RF frequency range covers the cur rently defined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator Manual The generator uses a single fixed frequency defined by Manual Source Frequency which is displayed when you select Manual cou pling Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling STATe on page 216 Manual Source Frequency Defines the fixed frequency to be used by the generator Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency on page 216 Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset With automatic frequency coupling a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW However the frequency used by the generator may differ from the input from the R amp S FSW The RF frequency may be multiplied by a specified factor or a frequency offset can be added or both Note The input for the generator frequency is not validated i e you can enter any val ues However i
419. us decimation Sample Rate SR UE A Full Scale Level Reference Level Fig 5 9 Signal path using the digital output The sample rate at the digital output corresponds to the sample rate defined by the user and which is used as the basis for analysis see chapter 5 2 3 Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Digital UO Data on page 33 The current sample rate is dis played in the Digital UO Output dialog box read only when the digital output is enabled see Output Settings Information on page 116 A maximum sample rate of 200 MHz is allowed for digital output For digital output the full scale level corresponds to the defined reference level with out the reference level offset and transducer Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Digital UO Data Definitions e Clock rate the rate at which data is physically transmitted between the R amp S FSW and the connected instrument both instruments must be able to process data at this rate the clock rate of the R amp S FSW at the output connector is 142 9 MHz using the Digital UO enhanced mode a data transfer rate of up to 200 Msps is pos sible R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing ee _ lt lt lt lt gt e Input sample rate ISR the sample rate of the useful data provided by the con nected instrument to the digital input e User Output Sample rate SR the sample rate that is defined by the user e
420. ust CONFigure H YS Tleresis UPPBAer rrt en ner ro i er enne n 268 SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG i SENSe ADJ st F REQUetICy rero net rre rrr enr rr a o EE CE ERE SERRE ER Eee SE HE Era ed SENSE JADJUSELEV Si E A AAA M SENS HAVER Age COUN M SENSe AVERagesnis TYPE itc iaa ancien idee ania SENSe AVERagesnP ESTATE P ctt ett dt a AA 286 SENSe CORREction COL Lect AC Quite 1 cm ni a eme raw Se rer Per t Pea 221 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND SENSe CORRection CVUIBIAS EE SENSe CORRection TE KE 207 SENSe CORRection CVI CLEAR ico tao ao iia 207 SENSe GORRection CVE COMMABHI sister cct e edd 208 SENSE CORRectiom CVE DATA EE 208 SENSe CORRection e LEE 209 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer SENSeCORRection ee RE SENSe JCORRection CVL SELECE EE SENSe CORRection CVLISNUMDB6 i gedd Eed 210 SENS6 CORRection METHO ET 222 SENS eeleren e UE 222 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GEN6erator err ta aa 223 SENSe CORRection STATO nto ete DEES ic 223 SENSe FREQu ncy CEN RET D 244 SENSe FREQu ncy CENTOt STEP intret tn tite A p v e e ee 245 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUNTO ricis tont eet rade euet oe E eset eee e Edda SSC 245 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth MODE SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth RESOluti n c cette tate REESEN 258 SENSEO D TAL ere rig CD aaa 259 SENSeTIQ EF F BENGILi icio tiec ine ect eee rte
421. ut DIQ RANGe UPPer ALTO eie tne ertt rhe rere eth n ener ni d reae tra n a ER cepa 192 INPut DIQ RANGS Her UNIT rtt rp ato 192 INPUEDIO SRA c INPUEDIQ SRATCAUT Obie NET nette INPUEEATRAUTO EE VIS Ta RRE EE INPUtFILEPA Tiboo A ENEE EEN INPut FILTer HPASs STATe S INPutiBIL fer IGESTA EE INPUEGAINISTA TO coccion AA EELER INPUEGAINEVAL UE ascos arta A A ll Tele Te INPutIQ BALanced STATe6 rir AAA INPutiQ FULLEscale AU T ioter citt eroe oie cte aa INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel INP QE YP cc M INPUES EEOC E ENT lee E RR e 181 INSTr ment GREalteREPLACO niente a 181 INSTr ment GREate NEW EN 181 INSTrument iDELete REPE a ra 182 INSTrument LIST INS TirUMONt RENAME E 183 INSTrument SELECH ET 184 LAYCUEADDE ll TEEN 270 LAYOUt Ee ele e NEE 271 LAY out IS ele KEE 272 EAYout REMove WINDOW sviar prsi rrr eh Ata 272 EAYouttREPEaceE WINDOW ueteri ipt o te iE reete oe tha Ex ret eet rn Pro ea iced er eeu 272 Edel i T 273 EAYout WINDOWsn gt ADD ic tivi ve e t ta tht di Pd vene dd eee dot ipt ee e rep 274 EAYoutWINDowsns IDENtIT9 ccce ete tace etse NE EA ea oir ioca Ma made ena 275 LAYout WINDow lt n gt REMove LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace
422. ut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier on and off 10 4 2 4 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier option B24 on page 120 INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the preamplification level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 241 The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R amp S FSW model R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier option B24 on page 120 Scaling the Y Axis DISPlayE WINBowens TRAGe Y SCALe ipei ci aa 242 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE nnne 243 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MODE AA 243 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition essen 243 DISPlayEWINBow n TRAGe Y SPAQCing 2 ionic terere aiiai dicas acad enis 243 DI
423. uto ID Threshold aine da 85 e Le EE 85 L Write to lt CVL table name 86 LO Level Defines the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Possible values are from 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm in 0 1 dB steps Default value is 15 5 dB Remote command SENSe MIXer LOPower on page 200 Data Input and Output Settings Signal ID Activates or deactivates visual signal identification Two sweeps are performed alter nately Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band USB of the LO the test sweep trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band LSB i e the reference sweep Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Mathematical functions with traces and trace copy cannot be used with the Signal ID function Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 201 Auto ID Activates or deactivates automatic signal identification Auto ID basically functions like Signal ID However the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if Signal ID is active at the same time If Signal ID is not active the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3 Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace Note that automatic signal identification is
424. vice e Measurement Time how long the data is to be captured e Record Length the number of samples to be captured also defined by sam ple rate and measurement time Select the Display Config button and select up to six displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 12 Exit the SmartGrid mode 13 Start a new sweep with the defined settings How to Capture Analog Baseband Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Analog baseband signals can also be captured via the optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 if installed 1 Connect the device that provides analog baseband input to the BASEBAND INPUT connectors at the front of the R amp S FSW For single ended input signals use the or Q connector or both For differential input signals connect the positive input to the and Q connectors and the negative input to the I and Q connectors Press the INPUT OUTPUT key on the front panel of the R amp S FSW Select Input Source Config and switch to the Analog Baseband tab to configure the Analog Baseband Interface a Set the state of the Analog Baseband signal source to On b Select the UO Mode depending on the signal at the input connectors or how you want to interpret it R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input How to Work with UO Data c If necessary change the input configuration setting depending on whether a single ende
425. width to be used by the R amp S FSW for UO data acquisition This setting is only available if the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 is installed Otherwise the maximum bandwidth is determined automatically For details on the maximum bandwidth see chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 24 Auto Default All installed bandwidth extension options are activated The currently available maximum bandwidth is allowed see chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 24 Note that using bandwidth extension options R amp S FSW B160 B320 may cause more spurious effects option B500 does not Note If a bandwidth extension 160 MHz is active the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is automatically used to provide IF output See the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual for details on the connec tor 80 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 80 MHz The bandwidth extension options R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 are deactivated 160 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 160 MHz The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B320 is deactivated Not available or required if bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 is installed Remote command TRACe IQ WBANd STATe on page 264 TRACe IQ WBBANd MBWIDTH on page 265 Omitting the Digital Decimation Filter No Filter This setting is only available when using the Di
426. wn to it For external and time domain trigger sources you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters lt Type gt POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 132 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce lt Source gt This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Configuring l Q Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt Source gt IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 IFPower Second intermediate frequency Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Inter
427. xport of I Q data to other applications e Optionally direct output of digital UO data via the Digital Baseband Interface option R amp S FSW B17 This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including remote control operation All functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Installation The R amp S FSW UO Analyzer application is part of the standard base unit and requires no further installation The Digital Baseband Interface option R amp S FSW B17 requires both hardware and firmware installation which is described in the release notes provided with the option at delivery 2 1 Starting the UO Analyzer Application The I Q Analyzer is an application on the standard R amp S FSW To activate the I Q Analyzer application 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel of the R amp S FSW A dialog box opens that contains all applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the UO Analyzer item Understanding the Display Information IQ Analyzer The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the I Q Analyzer applica tion The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the 1 Q Analyzer Overview dialog box which is displ
428. y Remote commands exclusive to general marker functionality DESAY AMA ies eene Eeer EEN e 291 CALC ulate MARKETS SIZE ui A a 291 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 155 CALCulate MARKer X SSIZe lt StepSize gt This command selects the marker step size mode 10 7 2 3 IO Analysis The step size defines the distance the marker moves when you move it with the rotary knob It therefore takes effect in manual operation only Parameters lt StepSize gt STANdard the marker moves from one pixel to the next POINts the marker moves from one sweep point to the next RST POINts Example CALC MARK X SSIZ STAN Sets the marker step size to one pixel Manual operation See Marker Stepsize on page 155 Configuring and Performing a Marker Search The following commands control the marker search CALGulate MARKer LOEX CUGE i n oh ed A ge EE 292 GALOulate n MARKerPENXQULISIOD acc rne itn ne t SEENEN SEENEN Se 292 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer SEARCHN ccccssscccecceceesceseseseceesceeceageceaseeeeeaacceseuseseaeeeeeeeneeeaes 293 CALCulateMARKer X SIMS ESTADO BEE 293 CAEGulateMARKerSEIMItS
429. y only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and I Q Input Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data eS SS AA A EEE SE EEE EEE EE SEE EEE EEE ES SS ee Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 270 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter As opposed to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 270 command the LAY
430. y the power sensor Power measurement results are provided as usual User Manual 1175 6449 02 16 104 6 4 2 2 Data Input and Output Settings For details see How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External PSE Trigger on page 111 Power Sensor Settings Power sensor settings are available in the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box Each sensor is configured on a separate tab Input Source Power Sensor Continuous Update e Sensori A y Select Auto Sensor e Zeroing Power Sensor Meas gt Ref Sensor3 Frequency Manual Reference Value 67 19 dBm Sensor on Frequency Coupling Use Ref Level Offset Unit Scale La Number of Readings Meas Time Average Normal am Duty Cycle External Power Trigger External Trigger Level 20 0 dBm Hysteresis Ion dB Dropout Time 100 0 us Holdoff Time 0 0 s Slope Rising Falling Zaroing TEE 106 Frequency MENU ie pce crest e vesacend deidad add banane ERES re ERE DNE 107 Ree E 107 gre 107 Meas Timeiiverage A 107 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas Ref 107 Reference cs eis 108 Use Rel Ly OMS LCS 108 Average Count Number of Readings 108 DUE EE 108 Using the power sensor as an external trigger ccce 108 L External Trigger Level 108 EE 109 L Trigger HA ra ici 109 BER e A eege 109 B o MEME 10
431. zed and connected to the Digital Baseband Interface of the analyzer Digital UO Input Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital baseband data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex 1 Q Box is established Digital UO Input Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred during establishing of the connect between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex 1 Q Box is established Digital UO Input PLL unlocked This bit is set if the PLL of the Digital 1 Q input is out of lock due to missing or unstable clock provided by the connected Digital UO TX device To solve the problem the Digital 1 Q connection has to be newly initialized after the clock has been restored Digital UO Input DATA Error This bit is set if the data from the Digital UO input module is erroneous Possible reasons e Bu errors in the data transmission The bit will only be set if an error occurred at the current measurement e Protocol or data header errors May occurred at data synchronization problems or vast transmission errors The bit will be set constantly and all data will be erroneous To solve the problem the Digital UO connection has to be newly initialized NOTE If this error is indicated repeatedly either the Digital UO LVDS connection cable or the receiving or transmitting device might be defect not used Digital UO Input FIFO Ov
432. zer remote A 179 Active probe A epr n 95 Amplitude Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 120 Configuration softkey 0 00 eee eeeeeneeeeees 116 Scaling 2 Settings nct eer dte a ene eer i rare 116 Analog Baseband Amplitude settings enr tene 120 A ants 79 lhput settings ete te mettere 93 Signal processirig ncn trennen 37 Analog Baseband B71 Full scale l vel areni rtt neret 122 1 Q mode Input type remote control A 196 Analog Baseband connector iain M 44 Analog Baseband Interface Ile TT NET Full scale level x ef we lune o casts ceusecstenwaty codlnesey Analog Baseband Interface B71 Amplitude settings crio rn 120 Basics A servesstvenzeccgtastescbe dase veveaedaccveseesiedecets 37 el E 39 INPUESSTINOS TEE 93 Analog input Analog Baseband Interface B71 39 Analysis Bandwidth PR 135 Bandwidth definition coooooooccncccccoconcccnnncnnno 24 33 1 Q data remote site Interval MSRA MSRT ss 135 SOMOS siii ici aint cit 147 Analysis interval Configuration MSRA remote 304 307 Analysis IM iii dia en nnn 70 Configuration Configuration MSRA remote 304 307 Applications Q Analyzer remote rie ede 179 APX External generator reete Att hardware setting TEE AMO WEE Electronic ZR Manual aiii alain

R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer UserManual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSW I/Q Analyzer UserManual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer UserManual